JP2023076722A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, an AT mode is set in which a push order notification for notifying a player of the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 can be generated. When a shift lottery to the AT mode is won, the mode is shifted to a preparation mode. When the result for starting the AT mode is not won in the preparation mode, the AT mode is started after a stop combination corresponding to the result winning for starting the AT mode is displayed in a rotation performance, after reaching the upper limit game number. However, if a game that performs the rotation performance is won as a result for starting the AT mode, the execution of the rotation performance is restricted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result that allows the specific combination of symbols to be stopped at the effective position set to the position visible through the display unit, it is possible to provide the specific privilege. special privilege means,
By the drive control means, when the start operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is stopped, and by the privilege provision means The normal operation is to be controlled so that the privilege can be granted,
Each of the revolving bodies is performed so as to perform a specific action that causes a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect control using the revolving body. a specific drive control means for controlling the body;
a specific means capable of restricting the specific action from being performed by the specific drive control means when the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific result in the specific game targeted for execution of the specific action;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; 4 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing AT type determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 4 is a flowchart showing AT start processing; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for rotation production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of the rotation production|presentation by each reel. It is a flow chart which shows external output setting 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows an external output setting 1st process. 9 is a flowchart showing timer update processing; It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. 10 is a flowchart showing preparation mode processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 4 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing; It is a flowchart which shows an external output setting 1st process. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. 13 is a flowchart showing rotation effect processing in Modification 2. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing error notification processing, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a first process of setting an external output in modified example 3; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a second external output setting process in modification 4; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for rotation production. It is a diagram for explaining the outline of the pseudo-game. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the AT mode start effect, the rotation effect and the external output from the relationship between the pseudo-game and the display during the pseudo-game. (a) is a diagram for explaining a modification of the execution timing of the pseudo-game in modification 1, (b) is a diagram for explaining a modification of the execution timing of the pseudo-game in modification 2 be. (a) is a flow chart showing a part of the rotation effect processing, (b) is a flow chart showing a part of the reel control processing, (c) ~ (h) is a pseudo game during the normal game. It is a diagram for explaining the outline of the game in the case. It is a diagram for explaining a modified example of notification during pseudo-game in Modified Example 3. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining changes in the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given in the third embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes. (a) is a flow chart showing preparation mode effect setting processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing avoidance effect setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in the fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows AT winning notification processing. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 9 is a flowchart showing timer update processing;

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are individually driven by the stepping motor to rotate independently. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an active line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor win is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the above-mentioned first small winning combination is possible due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor win is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the lines where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be recognized. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red clam" symbol or "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "white 7" symbol and "white shell" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been won.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins, in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins won, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the game result. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings that give a replay benefit (game value) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals include first to twelfth replay winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. To establish. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(e), the middle line L2 is stopped with all the "WHITE 7" symbols.

In the third replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(f), the "WHITE 7" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of 32R.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper stage watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that a so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stop on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game win or the 12th re-game win stops on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB wins. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 14(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win stop on the activated line ML, the "BAR" symbols stop on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). , "Red 7" symbols, "Red 7" symbols, and "BAR" symbols stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5.

When the "red clam" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB wins. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 14(c), when the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are stopped on the activated line ML, the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). , ``white 7'' symbols, ``white 7'' symbols, and ``red 7'' symbols stop in order from the left on the lower line L3.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Stop lamps 42b to 44b are built in the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b-44b is partially transmitted through the operating surfaces of the stop switches 42-44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b-44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42-44. When the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is valid, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to turn on, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is invalid, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled. are controlled to turn off.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 together with the medal insertion port 45 constitute input means for inputting game media. Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. A settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized driving voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the driving voltage drops below 10 volts. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

The external collective terminal board 121 is connected to a hall management device (hall computer), a data display device, etc. of the game hall, and is used to output information to the external devices of the game machine. As shown in FIG. 16, the external collective terminal board 121 has a game output terminal 121a for outputting information corresponding to the execution of one game, and a first BB and a second BB as a bonus state. For outputting information corresponding to the transition to the AT mode in which the operating order of the first BB output terminal 121b, the second BB output terminal 121c, and the stop switches 42 to 44 for outputting the corresponding information is notified. An AT output terminal 121d is provided.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display are connected to the output side. 65 is connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls these components 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be directly controlled.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer update process is performed to subtract/add the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts. Note that the timer update processing in step S108 will be described later in detail.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set, the current game state is determined to be the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. . When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning when IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a first external output setting process is performed. The first external output setting process is a process for transmitting information such as that the game state has changed or that it will change to the hall management device or the like via the external centralized terminal board 121 . The external output setting first process will be described later in detail.

In the subsequent step S402, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310, etc. processing. The rotation effect processing will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S403, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side causes each stop switch 42 . . . 44 are illuminated to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step S404, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S405, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S404 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S406. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S407 to S413 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Control is performed so that the stop lamps 42b to 44b are extinguished.

In step S407, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower row in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S408, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S408, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S409, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position is determined. In step S410, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S412, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S413, and the process returns to step S404.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins will be established, or none of the minor wins will be established and will be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor win is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S412 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, payout determination processing is performed in step S414. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S415. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, in step S416, the external output second setting processing is executed. The second external output setting process is a process for transmitting information such as that the game state has changed or that it will change to the hall management device or the like via the external centralized terminal board 121 . The second external output setting process will be described later in detail.

In the following step S417, a winning result handling process is performed. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S418. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S419, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process is performed to change the game mode to the re-game mode. , the medal payout process is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . Further, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S415 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on whether there is a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. Playing 2-bet games is allowed. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

The default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although an increase in medals cannot be expected, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rate of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step S521, after setting the specified bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the setting is such that the game is easily played in the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are completed, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. In order to play a bet game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45. - 特許庁

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, winning of the 2nd BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB win is carried over. Also in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for medal increase. Also, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the push-order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the first BB state and the second BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 23) that the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination will be won when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the second BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of steps S602 and S603 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step S604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, but the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and carry over the second BB to the normal game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 29, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not any one of the AT mode win flag, the first AT mode flag, and the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Here, in the present embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode with different odds of winning additional prizes are set as the AT mode. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize, and is set when the transition to the AT mode becomes possible. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the shift to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the state has not yet shifted to the AT mode. is. If neither flag is set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. It is deducted in some games and not in e.g. 2-bet games.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step S801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached 0 in step S802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps S803 to S808.

That is, in step S803, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step S804, then at step S805, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, then in step S806, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the lottery result of the game. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by eye A, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 1% for normal use, and if it is for CZ, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 3%. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Further, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After the AT mode shift lottery table is acquired in step S805 or step S806, AT mode shift lottery processing is performed in step S807 using the acquired shift lottery table and the lottery result of the game grasped in step S803. to run. Then, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step S808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step S802, the AT mode winning process of steps S809 to S812 is executed. Further, when it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, a process for AT mode non-win win is executed in steps S813 to S816.

In the processing for winning the AT mode, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition to the CZ mode has been won. In the case of winning during the CZ mode, processing for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps S810 and S811. That is, in step S810, processing for clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the CZ mode. This is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time a is consumed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S809, or after the process of step S811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step S812. Through such processing, affirmative determination is made in step S606 from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step S803. . As shown in FIG. 29, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. In other words, in the event that the AT mode transition lottery is not won in spite of the lottery result of a game in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, it is set so that the transition to the CZ mode is facilitated.

After the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery was won, and if not, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. In the case of CZ mode transition winning, in step S816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step S812 or step S816, a sign mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. After passing through the omen mode, the notification of the transition lottery that has been won is performed.

In step S817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. In this case, a longer predictive game number is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning the transfer lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step S817. As described above, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the CZ mode will end regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ mode. can be comprehended by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the sign mode is set to 0 games, so that the AT mode transition lottery is won even though the player knows that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. It is possible to reduce discomfort due to the suggestive notification of what has been done in the precursor mode.

In subsequent step S818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step S817 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step S819, a process of setting an omen flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S820, a process of setting an omen command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main AT lottery is performed. end the processing. The omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the omen mode is on, and the omen command indicates that the omen mode has been set, the number of games in the omen mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The display control device 81, which has received the portent command, grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing for executing an effect during the portent mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. conduct.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process executed when the AT mode winning flag or any AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games. be.

In the AT addition processing, first, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. If the specialized zone flag has not been set, it is determined in step S903 whether or not the second AT mode flag has been set. If the 2nd AT mode flag is not set and the transition to the 1st AT mode is confirmed, or if it is in the 1st AT mode, or after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the type of AT mode is still determined ( If the AT type determination process) has not been performed, in step S904, a process of acquiring the first AT additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the 2nd AT mode flag is set in step S903 and the transition to the 2nd AT mode is confirmed, or if the 2nd AT mode is in progress, the 2nd AT additional lottery table is displayed in step S905. Execute the process to retrieve. Further, when the special zone flag is set in step S901, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the special zone is executed in step S906.

As shown in FIG. 32, each additional lottery table has an additional winning percentage set according to the lottery result of the game. A lottery result in which it is more difficult to win in the lottery process of each game is set so that it is easier to win the extra lottery. In addition, when comparing the same lottery results, it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT than when using the additional lottery table for the 1st AT. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the additional lottery table for the special zone than when using the additional lottery table.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S904, step S905 or step S906, an additional lottery is executed in step S907, and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step S908. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, the number-of-addition-games lottery process is executed in step S909. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 32, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S909, in step S910, a process of adding the number of additional games to the AT game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After executing the process of step S910, after executing the process of setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S911, the AT add-on process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes processing for performing the add-on notification effect corresponding to the addition performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27), after the process of step S607 or step S608 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps S609-S613.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps S609 to S613, an overview of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be provided. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 33(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for the pushing hand. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to obtain a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is established when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the pushing order informing can occur is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the order of operations such as the order of pressing the bell, and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefits of the push order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the order of pressing in steps S609 to S613 will be described.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the pressing order bell wins, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any of the AT mode flags is set, in step S611, an instruction is given to perform push order notification corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Control monitor 68; Then, in step S612, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81. , terminates the actual pressing order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S609 that the bell is not won in the pressing order, the process proceeds to step S613. In step S613, after the AT start notification process is executed, the lottery result corresponding process is terminated.

<AT start notification processing>
In the present embodiment, when the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won is notified after passing through the portent mode, as described above. After notification of the winning of the transfer lottery is made, the AT mode is started when the result of the lottery of the game is a predetermined result for starting the AT mode. . In the AT start notification process, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, based on the result of winning the AT mode start result, a notification is made to establish a winning result corresponding to the AT mode start result. This is the process to be performed.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any of the normal replies A to C. That is, in the present embodiment, normal replies A to C are set as results for starting the AT mode, and when it is determined in step S1001 that normal replies A to C are not won, AT mode start notification is not the time to execute the AT start notification process, and the AT start notification process ends.

If one of the normal replies A to C is won, it is determined whether or not the AT preparation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is greater than 0 in step S1002. The AT preparation counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the situation after notification of winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has already been executed, and the winning of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is notified. It is a counter to which a predetermined number (40) is input in the game played, and which is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed. That is, the situation in which the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 indicates the situation in which less than 40 games have been played since the game in which the winning of the AT mode transition lottery was announced. In the present embodiment, after the number of games played after the AT mode transition lottery is announced reaches a predetermined number (40), the result for starting the AT mode is determined. The AT mode is started without waiting for , the details of which will be described later.

If the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 in step S1002, a process of setting a start game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1003. The start game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery result of the current game is the result for starting the AT mode.

In subsequent step S1004, it is determined whether or not the AT mode to be started this time is the first AT mode by determining whether or not the first AT mode flag is set. If it is the 1st AT mode, in step S1005, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the second regame winning is performed according to the type of the current normal reply. On the other hand, if the 1st AT mode flag is not set and the AT mode to be started this time is the 2nd AT mode, in step S1006, according to the type of the normal reply, the pressing order corresponding to the 3rd replay winning prize is determined. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that notification is made.

As shown in FIG. 36, when the normal replay A is won, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of center→left→right and center→right→left, the second replay is performed. When a winning is established and the operation is performed in the order of right→left→middle and right→middle→left, a third replay winning is established. If the normal reply B is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right, left → right → middle, the second replay winning is established, middle → When the operation is performed in the order of left→right, center→right→left, the third replay win is established. When the normal reply C is won, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of right → left → middle, right → middle → left, the second regame winning is established, left → When the operation is performed in the order of middle→right and left→right→middle, the third replay win is established.

In step S1005 and step S1006, according to each of these normal replies A to C, the pressing order notification of the operation order in which the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize can be established is executed. After that, in step S1007, a process of setting the pressing order notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT start notification process is terminated.

Here, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning, the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning may not be established. That is, as described above, the second replay win is achieved by stopping the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R on the activated line ML. When a prize is established (FIG. 10), the corresponding symbols on any of the reels are arranged so that there is a section in which the intervals between the symbols are 5 symbols or more. There are cases where the corresponding symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line ML. In addition, the winning of the third replay is established when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. By the way (FIG. 10), the corresponding symbols on any reel are arranged so that there is a section where the interval between the symbols is 5 symbols or more. It may not be possible to stop on the line ML. Therefore, the operation sequence for the second re-game winning and the operation sequence for the third re-game winning are associated with the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning, and both re-game winnings are established. It is set so that an event such as "No" will not occur. In other words, in the case where normal replays A to C are won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the second regame winning and the third regame winning, and the second regame winning It is set so that other re-game winnings will be established even if the third re-game winning cannot be established.

The processing (steps S1008 and S1009) when the AT preparation counter is 0 in step S1002 will be described later in detail.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S417 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1102. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1103. That is, the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 or step S1103 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where the precursor flag is set means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery, the winning of these transition lotteries has not yet been notified. In this case, in step S1105, the precursor mode process is executed, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step S1106. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the CZ mode process is executed in step S1107, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S1106, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the precursor flag is not set in step S1104 and the AT mode win flag is set in step S1108, it means that the AT mode transition lottery has already been won through the precursor mode. It means the situation after and before the transition to the AT mode occurs (this situation is hereinafter referred to as "preparation mode"). In the case of the preparation mode, the preparation mode processing is executed in step S1109, and then the winning result handling processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1108 that the mode is not the preparation mode, it is determined in step S1110 whether or not the first AT mode flag and the second AT mode flag are set. If any AT mode flag is set and the game is in the AT mode, the AT mode process is executed in step S1111, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1110, the winning result handling process is terminated.

The precursor mode process, the CZ mode process, the preparation mode process, and the AT mode process will be described below.

<Processing for precursor mode>
In the portent mode processing, as shown in FIG. 38, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step S1201. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has reached 0. If not, the precursor mode processing is terminated. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step S1203.

In the subsequent step S1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the current portent mode has been shifted based on the winning of the AT mode shift lottery. If the mode is the portent mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, AT type determination processing is executed in step S1205. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode with different odds of winning are provided as AT modes. This is a process for determining whether to set the 2AT mode.

<AT type determination processing>
Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, AT type lottery processing is executed in step S1301. In the AT type lottery process, for example, depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased after the transition to the advantageous section, the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous section, etc. Alternatively, the AT mode type this time is randomly determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the set value for the payout rate is set, the easier it is for the second AT mode to be selected. This time, the second AT mode may be easily selected, and although the second AT mode is normally difficult to select, once the second AT mode is selected, the next AT mode is also likely to be selected. Alternatively, the second AT mode may be easily selected in a scene where the number of medals increased or the number of games played in the early stage of the advantageous section is small.

After executing the process of step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether the result of the process of step S1301 is the first AT mode. If it is the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1303, and the process of setting the first AT command to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1304. After execution, the AT type determination process is terminated. In the display control device 81 that has received the first AT command, in the AT winning notification effect based on the AT winning notification command output set in subsequent step S1206, along with the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the winning AT mode is the first AT mode through the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

If it is the second AT mode in step S1302, the process of setting the second AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1305, and the second AT command is output to the display control device 81 in step S1306. After executing the setting process, the AT type determination process ends. In the display control device 81 that has received the second AT command, in the AT winning notification effect based on the AT winning notification command output set in subsequent step S1206, along with the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the winning AT mode is the second AT mode through the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the portent mode process, after executing the AT type determination process in step S1205, in step S1206, the process of inputting 40 as a predetermined number to the AT preparation counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. As already explained, the AT preparation counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games played after the notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery was made. After that, in step S1207, after executing the process of setting the AT winning notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the present portent mode process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the AT winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. At that time, as described above, the type of the winning AT mode is also notified.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1204 and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, processing for clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S1209, a CZ mode flag is set, and in step S1210, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step S1211, a process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this precursor mode process is terminated. Upon receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 notifies the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the start of the CZ mode.

As described above, the precursor flag is cleared (step S1203) and the CZ mode flag is set (step S1209), so that the CZ mode process is executed in the next winning result handling process. On the other hand, when the precursor flag is cleared and the CZ mode flag is not set (step S1204: YES), the preparation mode process is executed in the next winning result handling process.

<CZ mode processing>
In the CZ mode processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, processing for subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1401. In subsequent step S1402, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1401. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1403. After that, in step S1404, a process of setting a CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 notify that the CZ mode has ended. As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step S1403, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<AT mode processing>
In the AT mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, the AT game counter is decremented by 1 in step S1501. In subsequent step S1502, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1501. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, a process of clearing the AT mode flag (first AT mode flag or second AT mode flag) set in step S1503 is executed. After that, in step S1504, a process of setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. Then, in step S1505, the AT end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT mode processing ends. Upon receiving the AT end command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the AT mode has ended.

<Preparation mode processing>
In the preparation mode processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, it is determined in step S1601 whether or not the first AT mode flag is set. If the first AT mode flag is set, promotion lottery processing is executed in step S1602. In the promotion lottery process, a promotion lottery is performed to set the AT mode to be shifted this time to the second AT mode instead of the first AT mode. Specifically, a promotion lottery table (FIG. 43) is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and the above-mentioned promotion lottery is executed according to the lottery result of this game and the value of the AT preparation counter. In the promotion lottery table, for example, the promotion lottery is more likely to be won in the promotion lottery if the lottery result is less likely to be won in each game, for example, the chance C is more likely to be won in the promotion lottery than the chance A is. there is In addition, even in the promotion lottery based on the same chance A, it is easier to win the promotion lottery when the AT preparation counter value is 11-20 than when it is 21-40. It is set so that it becomes easier to win the promotion lottery as the number of games increases.

After executing the promotion lottery in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the promotion lottery is won in step S1603. If the promotion lottery is won, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1604. Upon receiving the upgrade command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the AT mode to be shifted has been upgraded from the first AT mode to the second AT mode. Then, in step S1605, a process of clearing the first AT mode flag and setting the second AT mode flag is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1601 or step S1603, or if the process of step S1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT preparation counter is executed. Then, in step S1607, it is determined whether or not the AT preparation counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1606.

If the AT preparation counter is not 0 in step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set. As already explained, the start game flag is a flag that is set in the AT start notification process (FIG. 35) when the AT mode start results (normal replies A to C) are won in the preparation mode. If the start game flag is not set, the preparation mode processing is terminated.

If the start mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning has been established as the game result of this time. As already explained, when normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode, the pushing order notification effect corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is executed. However, in a game in which normal replies A to C are won, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize, depending on the operation timing. There is a case where the winning of the second replay or the winning of the third replay is not established, but the winning of other replays (fourth replay, fifth replay) is established. In step S1609, the starting game flag is set, and in a game in which the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is established and the AT mode can be started, the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is established. It is determined whether or not a prize has been established.

If it is determined in step S1609 that the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize has been established, the process advances to step S1610 to add 50 corresponding to the initial number of AT mode games to the AT game counter. Execute the process. In addition, as already explained, after winning the AT mode shift lottery, AT mode addition processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing. There is a case where the winning lottery for adding the number of games is won and the number of games to be added is input to the AT game counter.

After that, in step S1612, the start game flag is cleared, and in step S1613, the process of setting the stop AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this preparation mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the stop-time AT start command performs control so that the AT mode start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

If it is determined in step S1607 that the AT preparation counter has become 0, that is, if the AT mode transition lottery is informed that 40 games have been completed since entering the preparation mode, step S1614. , it is determined whether or not the first AT mode flag is set, and if it is set, the process of setting the promotion command is executed in step S1615. Then, in step S1616, a process of clearing the first AT mode flag and setting the second AT mode flag is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, if the result for starting the AT mode is not won for 40 games after shifting to the preparation mode, the AT mode to shift to is the second AT mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1614, or if the process of step S1616 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1617. Also, if it is determined in step S1609 that the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1617, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S1618, a process of adding 50 as the number of initial games to the AT game counter is executed.

After executing the process of step S1618, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set in step S1619. If the starting game flag is set, normal replays A to C are won during the preparation mode, and the second re-game winning prize and the third re-game winning prize cannot be established, the process proceeds to step S1620, Execute processing to clear the start game flag. Then, in step S1621, it is determined whether or not the second AT mode flag is set, and if the first AT mode flag is set instead of the second AT mode flag, in step S1622, various flag storage areas 106d are stored. After executing the processing for setting the freeze flag at the first start, the preparation mode processing ends. The first freeze flag at start is a flag for performing the first rotation effect of stopping the symbol combination for the second replay winning prize on the activated line ML in the rotation effect processing (step S402) at the start of rotation of the next game. be. Although the rotation effect processing will be described in detail later, even if the second replay winning prize cannot be established as a result of starting the first AT mode by the first rotation effect, the first AT mode starting process is performed. As a result of the above, it is possible to notify the winning as a performance, and it is possible to give an impression that the first AT mode is started based on the winning as a result for starting the first AT mode.

If the start game flag is not set in step S1619 and 40 games have been completed in the preparation mode, or if the second AT mode flag is set in step S1621, normal reply A to If C is won and the third replay win cannot be established, the process of setting the second start freeze flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1623, and then this preparation is performed. Terminate mode processing. The freeze flag at the second start is a flag for performing the second rotation effect of stopping the symbol combination that is the third replay winning prize on the activated line ML in the rotation effect processing (step S402) at the start of rotation of the next game. be. Although the rotation effect processing will be described in detail later, even if the third replay winning prize cannot be established as a result of starting the second AT mode by this second rotation effect, the second AT mode starting process is performed. As a result of (1), it is possible to notify the winning as a performance, and it is possible to give an impression that the second AT mode is started based on the winning as a result for starting the second AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1703. Then, in step S1704, processing for setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1705, the number of games played during the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval. Then, in step S1706, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allows the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the advantageous section transition is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter is preferably performed using, for example, the set value or the lottery result of the game. It is preferable to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games, or to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games as the result of the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. A value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, the number of ceiling games is indicated. A production may be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step S1706, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step S1707.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1708 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1708, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous section winning game flag has not been set, after executing display start processing in step S1707 or after executing display continuation processing in step S1708, either is set or not. If it is determined in step S1709 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then in step S1710 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined that any AT mode flag is set in step S1709, in step S1711, the process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Execute. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1710 or step S1711, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1712. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1713, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1712 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step S1713, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1712 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1713, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1712. Further, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration in which "0" is always displayed by is also possible. A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S418 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second processing is terminated. If the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1802, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the subsequent step S1803, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1803, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay winning prize, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1803, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1804, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1805. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step S1806, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY is increased to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1807. In the subsequent step S1808, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1809, a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is executed.

Specifically, regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step S1809, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are initialized. Execute the process to return to For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

After executing the process of step S1809, the output state of the AT output terminal 121d on the external common terminal board 121 is checked in step S1810, and if the AT output terminal 121d is in the ON state, it is set to the OFF state. After executing the process for displaying the section, the second section display process ends. The AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when the AT mode is started, and is turned OFF when the AT mode ends, thereby being connected to the slot machine 10 via the external common terminal board 121. This is for outputting AT information corresponding to the AT mode (the number of AT mode transitions) to the data display of the game hall or the hall computer. By turning the AT output terminal 121d ON, the signal output from the AT output terminal 121d becomes a HI signal (high output state). The signal output from is a LOW signal (low output state). The data display device, hall computer, etc. connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal plate 121 can switch the signal output from the AT output terminal 121d from the LOW signal to the HI signal for AT. It grasps that the output terminal 121d has been turned on, and grasps that the shift to the AT mode has occurred. In addition, the signal output from the AT output terminal 121d is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, thereby grasping that the AT output terminal 121d has been turned OFF, and grasping that the AT mode has ended. The processing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S1806 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and that the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step S1811, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step S1807 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the processing for ending the advantageous section is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1902. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or after the processing of step S1902 has been executed, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step S1904, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or if the processing of step S1904 has been executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result There are precursor commands, addition commands, push order notification commands, ceiling commands, etc., which are set in the process (FIG. 27) and the first section display process (FIG. 44). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1906.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, or if the process of step S1906 has been executed, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1908, effect setting processing at each stop operation for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, or if the process of step S1908 has been executed, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S419 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to commands, the first BB start command, second BB start command, first BB end command, which are set in bonus state processing (Fig. 24), winning result handling processing (Fig. 37), and section display second processing (Fig. 45), There are a second BB end command, an AT win notification command, a CZ start command, a first AT command, a second AT command, a CZ end command, an AT end command, a promotion command, an AT start command at stop, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, in step S1910, all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or after the processing of step S1910 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1911, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S1911, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) are set, and without the main controller 101 Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win). If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step S2003, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

If it is determined in step S2001 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of a specific role. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game. Watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIG. 29, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results, and as shown in FIG. In the AT mode additional lottery triggered by these lottery results, the additional lottery is set to be more likely to be won than by other lottery results. If the lottery result of the game this time is that the specific combination is won, a process of setting the specific combination notification effect is executed in step S2005. In the setting processing of the specific role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002 or step S2004, or if the process of step S2003 or step S2005 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether or not an add command has been received. When the add-on command is received, setting processing of add-on effect is executed in step S2007. In the setting processing of the additional effect, an additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed as notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The mode of the additional effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the additional effect is performed. For example, the number of additional games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the additional effect is performed. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may include a so-called additional effect mode in which an additional effect is executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

If a negative determination is made in step S2006 or after the processing of step S2007 is executed, it is determined in step S2008 whether or not a precursor command has been received as the command at the start of this time. If an omen command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won and the omen mode is set, the sub-side omen counter provided in the various counter areas 183b in step S2009 indicates the number of omen games. Execute the process to enter the corresponding value. The sub-side omen counter corresponds to the omen counter in the main controller 101, and is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the omen mode. mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2008 or after the processing of step S2009 is executed, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than zero. If the sub-side predictor counter is greater than 0 and the predictor mode is on, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side predictor counter is executed in step S2011. Then, in step S2012, a process of setting an effect for the portent mode according to the value of the sub-side portent counter is executed. For example, the smaller the value of the sub-side omen counter, the more strongly suggesting that one of the transition lotteries has been won may be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

If a negative determination is made in step S2010, or after the processing of step S2012 is performed, AT start processing is performed in step S2013, rotation effect processing is performed in step S2014, and other operations are performed in step S2015. After executing the effect setting process at the start, the present effect setting process at the start ends. In step S2015, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do. The AT start processing and rotation effect processing will be described later in detail.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step S1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 46) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the AT winning notification command, the CZ start command, the first AT command, the second AT command, the CZ end command, the AT end command, and the promotion command. This is a process for setting effects in the case of a full-stop command such as a command or an AT start command at stop.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. If the CZ start command has been received, in step S2102 the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and in step S2103 the CZ start effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the effect setting process for the purpose. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the CZ start effect displays that the CZ mode is started and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10) on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not a CZ end command has been received. If the CZ end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side CZ flag is executed in step S2105, and the effect setting for performing the CZ end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S2106 Execute the process. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the CZ end effect is set such that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 and the end of the CZ mode is notified. It should be noted that the CPU 181 sets the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect for the CZ mode in each game in which the sub-side CZ flag is set. The effect for the CZ mode is such that the background color, appearing characters, etc. are made different from those of the normal mode so that the player can recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. Further, when performing the effect for the CZ mode, the CPU 181 controls the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode to update (decrease) the display according to the progress of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S2104, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not an AT winning notification command has been received. If the AT winning notification command has been received, in step S2108 the process of setting the preparation mode flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and in subsequent step S2109 it is determined whether or not the first AT command has been received. . If the first AT command is received, after executing the process of setting the sub-side first AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 183a in step S2110, the process of setting the AT winning notification effect is executed in step S2112. do. On the other hand, if the first AT command has not been received in step S2109, but the second AT command has been received, then in step S2111 processing is executed to set the sub-side second AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 183a. Then, in step S2112, the process of setting the AT winning notification effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 53(a), for example, the AT win notification effect is set with an effect of notifying that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery and the type of AT mode that has been won. As an effect for notifying the type of AT mode, for example, the background color of the auxiliary display section 65 may be changed (red for the first AT mode, blue for the second AT mode). A character corresponding to the type may be displayed (a first AT character for the first AT mode, and a second AT character for the second AT mode). Further, the CPU 181 sets the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect for the preparation mode in each game in which the preparation mode flag is set. The performance for the preparation mode is made different so that the player can distinguish between when the sub-side first AT mode flag is set and when the sub-side second AT mode flag is set. If the sub-side first AT mode flag is set, for example, as shown in FIG. If so, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), a character display such as "Preparing for AT" is displayed. 53(b) and FIG. 54(b) show different background colors by different hatch settings.

If a negative determination is made in step S2107, it is determined in step S2113 whether or not a promotion command has been received. If the promotion command has been received, the sub-side first AT mode flag is cleared and the sub-side second AT mode flag is set as described above in step S2114. Then, in step S2115, a process for setting the promotion effect is executed. As for the promotion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), a effect in which a male character raises a roar is set. By clearing the sub-side first AT mode flag and setting the sub-side second AT mode flag as described above, the production during the preparation mode is changed from the production shown in FIG. The effect is switched to that shown in FIG. 54(b).

If a negative determination is made in step S2113, it is determined in step S2116 whether or not the stop AT start command has been received. When the stop AT start command is received, in step S2117, the preparation mode flag is cleared, and in step S2118, the effect setting process for performing the AT start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. do. For the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), an effect is set in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is performed. Note that the AT start effect differs to the extent that the player can identify it according to the type of AT mode to be started. For example, the background and effect sound are set differently.

If a negative determination is made in step S2116, it is determined in step S2119 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If the AT end command has been received, in step S2120, the process of clearing the first sub-side AT mode flag and the second sub-side AT mode flag is executed, and in step S2121, the AT end effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Executes the effect setting process for performing in . For example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the AT end effect is a display indicating that the AT mode is ending (character display such as "See you later"), and notifies the number of games played in the current AT mode and the number of medals won. is set.

After the processing of step S2103, step S2106, step S2112, step S2115, step S2118 or step S2121 is executed, or after a negative determination is made in step S2119, other effect setting processing at all stop is executed in step S2122. After that, the effect setting process at the time of all stop ends. In step S2122, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 lights up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and control is performed during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

<AT start processing>
Next, the AT start process executed in step S2013 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT start process, if the AT mode start results (normal replies A to C) are won during the preparation mode, an operation instruction notification is performed so as to establish the second regame win or the third regame win. This is a process for

That is, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the preparation mode flag is set. If the preparation mode flag is not set, the AT start processing is terminated. If the preparation mode flag is set, the preparation mode effect is set in step S2202. As described above, the effects shown in FIGS. 53(b) and 54(b) are set as preparation mode effects. In the situation where the preparation mode effect of b) is set and the sub-side second AT mode flag is set, the preparation mode effect of FIG. 54(b) is set.

In the subsequent step S2203, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply A to C winning. If the normal reply A to C is not won, the AT start processing is terminated as it is. As already explained, when normal replies A to C are won during the preparation mode, the main control unit 101 outputs a push order notification command. Therefore, in the case where normal replies A to C are won in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the sub-side first AT mode flag is set in step S2204, and the sub-side first AT mode flag is set. In this case, in step S2205, a process for setting the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second re-game winning to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 based on the pressing order notification command is executed. After that, the AT start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub-side first AT mode flag is not set and the sub-side second AT mode flag is set, then in step S2206, based on the above-described push order notification command, the third replay win is achieved. After executing the processing for setting the corresponding pressing order notification effect to be performed on the auxiliary display portion 65 and the speaker 64, the AT start processing is ended.

As the pressing order notification effect set in steps S2205 and S2206, the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning is notified, and the symbol for the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning are displayed. An effect is set to notify the winning symbols. For example, in step S2205, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the second re-game winning is notified, and when the second re-game winning is established, the middle line L2 is displayed. The auxiliary display section 65 is set to perform an effect for notifying the symbols (“White 7” symbol-“White 7” symbol-“White 7” symbol) to be stopped at the time. Also, for example, in step S2206, as shown in FIG. The auxiliary display section 65 is set to perform an effect for notifying the symbols ("White 7" symbol-"White 7" symbol-"Red 7" symbol) to be stopped on the line L2. It should be noted that instead of the symbol to stop on the middle line L2, it may be configured to notify the symbol to stop on the active line ML. ” symbol-“cherry” symbol, and in the case of the third replay win, “white 7” symbol-“white shell” symbol-“BAR” symbol. In these cases, the line (the medium line L2 or the effective line ML) on which the notified symbols should be stopped may be notified together.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the advantageous section or the number of ceiling games is reached and the right to transition to the AT mode is acquired, the AT winning notification effect (Fig. 53 ( a)) is executed, and notification is made to the effect that the right has been acquired. If normal replays A to C are won as a result for starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, an operation instruction notification is performed so as to establish the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize (Fig. 56), and the second replay When a game win or a third replay win is established, the AT mode is started. By doing so, the transition to the AT mode requires the intervention of the player's operation, and compared to the configuration that is completed only on the gaming machine side, the interest in the game is preferably improved. In particular, the right to shift to the AT mode obtained by a lottery or the like is exercised by the player's own stop operation to start the AT mode, and the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the activated line ML based on the player's operation. It is possible to make full use of the real pleasure of the slot machine, such as obtaining a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery, in the AT mode.

Here, in the preparation mode, when the pressing order bell is won, the pressing order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is executed, and an additional lottery according to the lottery result is performed. and the promotion lottery from the 1st AT mode to the 2nd AT mode is also performed. Although there is a feeling of wanting to play a game that is established, it is also considered that the player wants to continue the preparation mode as long as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an upper limit is provided for the number of continuous games in the preparation mode, and when the upper limit number of games (40 games) is reached, AT It is configured to start the mode. Therefore, a configuration for starting the AT mode when the number of games in the preparation mode reaches the maximum number of games will be described below.

<Rotation effect processing>
First, the rotation effect processing (step S402) in the reel control processing (FIG. 22) on the main controller 101 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first start freeze flag and the second start freeze flag are set in the game in which the AT preparation counter becomes 0 in the preparation mode processing (FIG. 42), and in the normal reply A to C winning games in the preparation mode. This flag is set when the 2nd re-game win or the 3rd re-game win is not established (steps S1622 and S1623). If none of the start-time freeze flags are set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is.

If any of the start freeze flags is set, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is normal reply A to C winning. In other words, the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode when the AT preparation counter is 0, or the game in which the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize was not established in the normal reply A to C winning games in the preparation mode It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the next game is normal reply A to C winning. If the normal reply A to C is not won, the process advances to step S2303 to execute a process of setting a rotation effect command as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG. The rotation effect command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the start of the AT mode is notified by performing the rotation effect using the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the subsequent step S2304, a process of grasping the symbol positional relationship of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. As already explained, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided with a reel index sensor. Based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor, the number of excitation pulses output to rotate the reel, etc., It is possible to grasp the symbol position that is stopped (previous stop).

Then, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the freeze at the first start is set, and if it is set, in step S2306, based on the symbol position grasped in step S2304, 2 seconds later ( The reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated at a low speed (first rotation speed) in a state where the symbols for the second replay prize are aligned after the first period). Set the acceleration of More specifically, for example, the left reel 32L is used as a reference reel, and based on the grasped symbol position, the second replay symbol ("white 7" symbol) arranged on the reference reel before the start of rotation. , and the number of separated symbols from the middle reel 32M and the second replay symbols ("white shell" symbol, "cherry" symbol) on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. For example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously started to rotate in the forward direction, and the left reel 32L, which is the reference reel, rotates three times after 2 seconds, the left reel 32L has 20 symbols. In 3 turns, 60 patterns are rotated in 2 seconds. In this case, the separated pattern number between the second re-game pattern of the middle reel 32M and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is a pattern, and the separation pattern between the second re-game pattern of the right reel 32R and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is Assuming that the number is b symbols, the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is set to rotate by the number of symbols obtained by adding a symbol to 60 symbols after 2 seconds, and the acceleration of the right reel 32R is set to 60 symbols after 2 seconds. It is set so that it rotates by the number of symbols including b symbols. After 2 sec later, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to rotate at a constant low speed after the symbol combination that results in the second replay winning prize is rotated.

If the freeze flag at the first start is not set at step S2305 and the freeze flag at the second start is set, at step S2307, based on the symbol position grasped at step S2304, 2 sec The reels 32L, 32M rotate at a low speed (first rotation speed) in such a state that the symbols for the third replay winning prize are aligned after (after the first period). , 32R. More specifically, for example, the left reel 32L is used as a reference reel, and based on the grasped symbol position, the third replay symbol ("white 7" symbol) arranged on the reference reel before the start of rotation. , and the number of separated symbols from the middle reel 32M and the third replay symbols ("white shell" symbol, "BAR" symbol) on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. For example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously started to rotate in the forward direction, and the left reel 32L, which is the reference reel, rotates three times after 2 seconds, the left reel 32L has 20 symbols. In 3 turns, 60 patterns are rotated in 2 seconds. In this case, the separated pattern number between the second re-game pattern of the middle reel 32M and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is a pattern, and the separation pattern between the second re-game pattern of the right reel 32R and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is Assuming that the number is b symbols, the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is set to rotate by the number of symbols obtained by adding a symbol to 60 symbols after 2 seconds, and the acceleration of the right reel 32R is set to 60 symbols after 2 seconds. It is set so that it rotates by the number of symbols including b symbols. After 2 seconds, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to rotate at a constant low speed after the symbol combination that results in the third replay winning prize rotates.

After executing the process of setting the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in step S2306 or step S2307, all reels are started to rotate in step S2308, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set based on the set acceleration. , to drive and control the corresponding stepping motor. Then, in step S2309, a process of inputting 1879, which is a value corresponding to the second period (2.8 sec) longer than the first period (2 sec), to the rotation counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The rotation counter is a counter that is decremented by one each time the timer update process (step S108) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is activated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate according to the acceleration set for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and as shown in FIG. After 2 seconds, the symbol combinations for the second re-game winning prize and the third re-game winning prize are completed, and in this state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a low speed.

In the following step S2310, the process waits until the rotation counter input in step S2309 becomes zero. It should be noted that the timer interrupt process and the normal process (FIG. 18) including the rotation effect process are processes that are started independently of each other, and even while waiting in step S2310, the timer interrupt process can execute the subtraction process of the rotation counter. In step S2310, an affirmative determination is made because the rotation counter becomes 0.

After the first period (2 sec) has passed since all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate in step S2308, the symbol combination for the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is aligned and rotated at a low speed. , and when the second period (2.8 sec) has passed since the process of step S2309 was executed and the determination in step S2310 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the symbol combination that results in the second regame winning or the third replay winning after 0.2 sec (third period) from the current time stops at the active line ML. A process for setting the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Then, in step S2312, the stepping motors corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, 32R are driven and controlled based on the acceleration set in step S2311 to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Thereafter, in step S2313, a process of inputting 134, which is a value corresponding to the third period (0.2 sec), to the rotation counter is executed. Wait until it becomes 0.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is stopped on the activated line ML. The stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the rotation effect is distinguished from the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in step S411 of the reel control process. Therefore, in the following description, the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the spinning effect is also referred to as a temporary stop.

When 0.2 sec (third period) has passed since the process of step S2313 was executed, that is, when a total of 3 sec (fourth period) has passed since all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating, When the symbol combination that results in the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is temporarily stopped on the line ML, an affirmative determination is made in step S2314 and the process proceeds to step S2315. In step S2315, a process of setting an AT start command at startup as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command at the time of starting controls such that the AT start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In step S2316, a process of inputting 3355, which is a value corresponding to the fifth period (5 sec), to the rotation counter is executed, and in subsequent step S2317, it waits until the rotation counter input in step S2316 becomes zero. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are also maintained in the temporarily stopped state (FIG. 58(d)).

When 5 seconds (fifth period) have passed since the process of step S2316 was executed, that is, 5 seconds have passed since the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize was temporarily stopped on the activated line ML. If so, an affirmative determination is made in step S2317 and the process proceeds to step S2318. In step S2318, a process of clearing the freeze flag at the first start and the freeze flag at the second start is executed, and then the rotation effect process is terminated. In this case, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in the rotation start process (FIG. 58(e)) which is started following the rotation effect process in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

In other words, if 40 games have been played without winning normal replies A to C in the preparation mode, or even if normal replies A to C have been won, the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize can be established. If it is not possible, when the next game is started, a rotating performance is generated in which the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is stopped on the effective line ML. In addition, in the following explanation, the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize are established in the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode when the AT preparation counter is 0, and in the normal reply A to C winning game in the preparation mode. The game next to the game not played is referred to as the target game of the rotation effect.

In the rotation production process, if the lottery result of the target game of the rotation production is normal reply A to C winning in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 in step S2319, Is the freeze flag set at the start set when the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is not established in the normal reply A to C winning game in the preparation mode, or When the AT preparation counter becomes 0, it is determined whether it has been set. If it is set when the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is not established in the normal reply A to C winning games in the preparation mode, the process proceeds to step S2303, and the rotation effect is executed. process. On the other hand, when the freeze flag at the start is set by the AT preparation counter becoming 0, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. In other words, when the lottery result of the game in which the preparation mode reaches the upper limit number of games and the rotation effect is executed is the normal reply A to C winning, the above rotation effect does not occur at the start of the current game.

In this case, in the AT start notification process (FIG. 35), an operation instruction notification for establishing the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize in the current game is performed. That is, in the AT start notification process, if the lottery result of this game is normal reply A to C winning (step S1001: YES) and the AT preparation counter is 0 (step S1002: NO), go to step S1008 Then, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set. If any of the freeze flags at the start is set, and the lottery result of the game targeted for the rotation effect by reaching the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode is normal reply A to C winning, affirmative in step S1008 Then, in step S1009, a process of clearing the corresponding start-time freeze flag is executed. Then, the process advances to step S1003 to execute a process of setting a start game flag, and executes a process of notifying an operation instruction from step S1004 onwards.

That is, when the AT preparation counter becomes 0 and the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode starts rotating, the symbol combination that results in the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML. When the lottery result of the next game is normal replay A to C winning, the rotating performance is not generated, and the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize are aimed as usual. It is configured to be operated by By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the AT mode has been started by the user's own operation.

On the other hand, if normal replays A to C are won during the preparation mode and the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize cannot be established, the lottery result of the game next to the game in question will be normal. Even if a reply A to C is won, a rotating performance is generated to temporarily stop the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize on the effective line ML, and the AT mode is started. I am trying to let This is because the player who is playing the slot machine 10 cannot achieve the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning in the previous game. This is because it is considered that the player is not good at performing operations aiming at winning the third replay. In other words, if the player is made to aim for the second replay win or the third replay win in the game following the game in which the win was not established, such a player will be subjected to an unfamiliar operation again. It becomes a forced configuration, which may lead to a significant decrease in the desire to play. In that respect, as described above, if the 2nd replay winning prize or the 3rd replay winning prize cannot be established, even if the normal reply A to C is won in the next game, By adopting a structure for performing a rotation effect, it becomes a structure in which the weak operation is compensated for by the rotation effect, and it is possible to provide a game that matches players with various skill levels.

By the way, as described above, even if the lottery result of the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode is a normal reply A to C winning, and the execution of the rotation effect is restricted, it is already for the preparation mode. Since the processing for starting the AT mode is executed in steps S1607 to S1623 of the processing, the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize are established in the game in which the execution of the rotation effect is restricted. AT mode is started even if it cannot be activated. By doing so, the upper limit of the preparation mode is set such that the AT mode is not easily started while giving the opportunity to establish the winning result for the AT mode start by one's own operation as described above. so as not to obliterate its significance.

<Rotation effect processing>
As the effect setting process for performing the rotating effect, the rotating effect process executed in step S2014 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not a rotation effect command has been received. The rotation effect command is a command output at the start of the rotation effect in the rotation effect process (FIG. 50) as described above. When the rotation effect command is received, the process of clearing the preparation mode flag is executed in step S2402. Then, in step S2403, processing for setting so that the rotation effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. In the rotating effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), a female character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 so that the player can understand that the rotating effect will be executed by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The production is set to display the appearance of happily shouting "I'm going!"

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or if the process of step S2403 has been executed, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not an AT start command has been received. The AT start command at the time of starting is output when the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize in the rotating effect temporarily stop on the activated line ML in the rotating effect processing (FIG. 50) as described above. command. When the AT start command is received at the time of starting, in step S2405, a process for setting the AT start effect at the time of starting to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. In step S2405, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the first rotation effect is executed based on the sub-side first AT mode flag and the sub-side second AT mode flag set in the various flag storage area 183a. If so, an effect for notifying that the first AT mode is started is set, and if the second rotating effect is being executed, an effect for notifying that the second AT mode is to be started is set. . When a negative determination is made in step S2404, or after the processing of step S2405 is executed, the rotation effect processing ends.

In this case, as described above, in the rotating effect process, after the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning are temporarily stopped on the activated line ML, the state is set to be maintained for 5 seconds. are doing. In other words, in a state in which the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning prize and the third re-game winning prize are temporarily stopped in the rotating effect, the AT start effect at the time of starting can be performed, and the AT mode is started. It is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player an impression associated with the stop roll. Moreover, by setting a period for maintaining the state in which the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize are temporarily stopped on the activated line ML, the rotation effect is started and then the rotation effect is started. is completed and the rotation start process (step S403) as a normal game is executed is longer than the wait period (4.1 sec) set in each game. That is, in step S2309 in the rotating effect, 3 sec is set from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the temporary stop of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R. , 32R temporarily stopped for 5 seconds, the period from the start of rotation to the rotation start process (step S403) in the rotation effect becomes 8 seconds, which is longer than the wait period (4.1 seconds). By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the rotation effect similar to a normal game, and to suitably secure the effect time for performing the AT start effect at the time of starting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the AT mode is started via the preparation mode. Since the AT mode is started when winning can be established as a result of starting the AT mode, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the intervention of the player is required when starting the AT mode. Moreover, since the AT mode is started as a result of the game, the AT mode is started by luck of the player, and the impression is that it is not a game in which the AT mode is unilaterally progressed on the gaming machine side. strengthened. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game is favorably increased.

On top of that, in the preparation mode, the push order notification when the push order bell is won is performed, and the AT mode promotion lottery and additional lottery are performed, so the result for AT mode start is not won in the preparation mode It is advantageous for the player to continue the preparation mode for a long time. As a result, the player wants the preparation mode to continue for a long time, and the player feels that winning the result for starting the AT mode as described above is unfortunate, which hinders the increase in attention to the game. It can be considered that Therefore, in the present embodiment, a continuation upper limit is provided for the preparation mode, and when the upper limit is reached, the AT mode is started even if the result for starting the AT mode is not won. It is possible to prevent the range of change in the degree of advantage due to continuity from being too large, and to encourage the player not to unfortunately perceive winning the result for starting the AT mode before the upper limit of the preparation mode. .

Here, the probability of winning the result for starting the AT mode during the preparation mode is the probability of winning one of the normal replies A to C, which is about 1/8.86. In other words, the denominator of the winning probability of the result for starting AT mode is set to be smaller than the number of games that can be continued in the preparation mode. It is set to be elected to Lips A to C. With such a balance, although it is desired to continue the preparation mode for a long time, basically it is rare to reach the continuation upper limit in the preparation mode, and it is possible to win the result for starting the AT mode on the way. It is possible to make it a game on the premise of. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the game aiming at winning as a result for starting the AT mode without making the player think that winning the result for starting the AT mode is not so regrettable.

Moreover, when the upper limit of the preparation mode is reached, not only the AT mode is simply started, but also the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning for the above-mentioned AT mode start by the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, so even if the player's luck and participation elements are pseudo, the structure is embodied by the rotation performance, and the AT mode is started by the player's own operation. It is possible to enjoy the effect of the game even when the preparation mode reaches the upper limit.

In addition, when the upper limit of the preparation mode is reached, the second AT mode is started instead of the first AT mode even if the promotion lottery is not won, and the second AT mode is started in the second rotation performance. Because the configuration is embodied by the above, the regret of reaching the upper limit as described above is offset, and the impression that you have won the second AT mode by your own operation is strengthened, and you start AT mode with the best feeling. It is possible to

Here, among normal replies A to C as a result for starting AT mode, especially for normal reply A, the winning probability varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, and the higher the setting, the harder it is to win. (See, for example, FIG. 20). That is, in the preparation mode, the probability of winning the result for starting the AT mode is set to be lower as the setting is higher, and the probability of reaching the upper limit of the preparation mode is also lower as the setting is higher, resulting in the second AT mode The higher the setting, the higher the ratio set to . In this case, if you win normal reps A to C when the upper limit is reached, the execution of the rotation effect is restricted. It is possible to say In other words, the higher the setting, the more easily the rotation effect is executed, and a game in which the set value is predicted using the rotation effect as an index can also be realized. Furthermore, the higher the setting, the easier it is to execute the rotation effect that restricts the progress of the normal game. It is also possible to effectively suppress a rapid rise in the number of balls paid out by a spinning effect.

In the case where the result for starting the AT mode is won during the preparation mode, the winning result for starting the AT mode can be established by the player's operation as described above. Winning may not be established as a result of starting the AT mode. In that case, for example, there is a possibility that an act of trying to enjoy the benefit of reaching the upper limit is performed by not establishing a winning as a result of starting the AT mode. In this respect, in the present embodiment, if the result for starting the AT mode is won, and if the result for starting the AT mode does not result in winning, the AT mode is started in the next game in which the winning did not occur. Since it is configured, it is possible to preferably avoid the act of not starting the AT mode until the upper limit is reached, and even in such a case, the AT mode is started with a rotating effect. As a result, there is no event in which the AT mode is started without stopping (temporary stop) of the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode, and the AT mode is started by the player's intervention. You can try not to dilute the quotes that are given.

And, as described above, the start of the AT mode and the stop (temporary stop) of the winning symbol combination for the start of the AT mode are set as a set. , The contents of the performance when the AT mode is started are unified, and the AT mode is started in spite of the fact that the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode is not stopped (temporarily stopped). There is no By doing this, the start of the AT mode becomes easy to understand visually, and even though the AT mode has not started, the winning rate of the 1st minor role to the 6th minor role winning rate when winning the bell in the order of pushing is Even if a fraudulent act such as intentional increase is performed, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to identify it easily.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the AT mode is started from the slot machine 10 via the external common terminal board 121 in combination with the stop (temporary stop) of the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode. It is configured to output information. Such a configuration will be described below.

<External output setting second process>
First, the external output setting second process executed in step S416 of the reel control process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second external output setting process is a process that is executed when it is determined in the reel control process that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S412: YES). is also a process performed first.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the output state of the first BB output terminal 121b or the second BB output terminal 121c in the external common terminal board 121 is ON. The output terminal 121b for the first BB is turned ON when shifting to the first BB state, and is for outputting information indicating that the state has shifted to the first BB state to an external device connected to the game machine. is. Further, the output terminal 121c for the second BB is turned ON when shifting to the second BB state, and is used to output information indicating that the state has shifted to the second BB state to an external device connected to the game machine. belongs to. The output signals from these BB output terminals 121b and 121c are switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal when turned ON, and switched from a HI signal to a LOW signal when turned OFF, similarly to the output terminal 121d for AT. is configured as In the game hall management device (hall computer) and data display connected to the gaming machine via the external common terminal board 121, information from the first BB output terminal 121b and the second BB output terminal 121c By grasping, it is possible to grasp that the game state has shifted to the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and by totaling it, it is possible to grasp the number of transitions, and the state transitions and transitions can be grasped. Notification corresponding to the number of times can be executed.

If one of the BB output terminals 121b and 121c is ON in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the corresponding BB status flag is set. That is, if the first BB output terminal 121b is in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag is set, and if the second BB output terminal 121c is in the ON state, the second BB state flag is set. Determine whether it is set. As already described, the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag are flags that are set when transitioning to the BB state in the bonus state process (FIG. 24) and cleared when the BB state ends. In other words, the situation in which the BB output terminals 121b and 121c are ON in step S2501 and the corresponding BB state flag is set in step S2502 means that the corresponding BB state has not yet been set in the previous bonus state processing. This is the case where it is determined to be continued. On the other hand, the situation in which the BB output terminals 121b and 121c are ON in step S2501 and the corresponding BB status flag is not set in step S2502 means that the corresponding BB This is the case when a process for terminating the state has been executed.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the corresponding BB status flag is not set, then in step S2503 processing is executed to turn off the corresponding BB output terminals 121b and 121c. As a result, the external device connected to the gaming machine can recognize that the BB state has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, or after the processing of step S2503 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the start game flag is a flag that is set in the AT start notification process (FIG. 35) when the AT mode start results (normal replies A to C) are won during the preparation mode. Yes (step S1003), this flag is cleared in the preparation mode process (FIG. 42) in the winning result handling process (step S1620). If the start game flag is set, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize has been established. If a negative determination is made in step S2504 or step S2505, the second external output setting process is terminated.

In the preparation mode, if the result for starting the AT mode is won and the result for starting is established, in step S2506, the AT output terminal 121d of the external common terminal board 121 is set to the ON state. , the second external output setting process is terminated. As already explained, by setting the AT output terminal 121d to the ON state, the output signal from the AT output terminal 121d is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal, and the data display of the game hall and the hall computer are switched. By grasping , it becomes possible to grasp that the AT mode has started.

<External output setting first process>
Next, the external output setting first process executed in the reel control process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output signal first process is before the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the reel control process is started, and furthermore, from the rotation effect process (step S402) for executing the above rotation effect. is also a process performed first.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not any of the BB output terminals 121b and 121c is in the ON state. If both of the BB output terminals 121b and 121c are in the OFF state, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not any of the BB state flags is set. That is, if the corresponding BB state flag was set in the bonus state processing of the previous game and the game to be started this time is the first game in the BB state, then in step S2603, the BB flag corresponding to the set BB state flag is displayed. A process for turning on the output terminals 121b and 121c is executed.

If the game to be started this time is not in the BB state in step S2602, the process advances to step S2603 to execute processing for turning on the game output terminal 121a of the external centralized terminal board 121. FIG. The game output terminal 121a is turned on when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and is turned off before the game ends. This is for outputting information indicating that the game has been executed to an external device connected to the gaming machine. As with the AT output terminal 121d, the output signal from the game output terminal 121a is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal when turned ON, and switched from a HI signal to a LOW signal when turned OFF. It is In the game hall management device (hall computer) and data display device connected to the game machine via the external centralized terminal board 121, information from the game output terminal 121a is grasped so that one game can be played. It is possible to grasp that the game has been executed, and by summarizing it, it is possible to grasp the number of times the game has been executed, and it is possible to make a notification corresponding to the execution of the game and the number of times it has been executed.

In the subsequent step S2605, a process of inputting 10 corresponding to about 0.15 sec to the game counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the timing at which the game output terminal 121a, which was turned ON at the start of the game, should be turned OFF. is a counter that

If the determination in step S2601 is affirmative, or if the processing in step S2603 or step S2605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set. If none of the start-time freeze flags are set, the first external output setting process is terminated. If any freeze flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2607 to execute processing for setting a reservation output flag in the various flag storage area 106d. After executing the process of inputting 2100 corresponding to about 3.1 sec (sixth period) to the reserved output counter, the external output setting first process is terminated. The reserved output flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in a reserved state before the AT output terminal 121d of the external common terminal board 121 is turned on. The reserved output counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d should be turned ON in the reserved state, and is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is started. is a counter.

That is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating effect by each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the AT output terminal is set before the rotating effect is executed. 121d is turned on.

<Timer update processing>
The timer update process executed in step S108 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) as the process when the reserved state is set before the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON as described above is shown in the flowchart of FIG. will be described with reference to.

In the timer update process, first, in steps S2701 to S2704, a process for managing the game output terminal 121a is performed. That is, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the game output terminal 121a is in the ON state, and if it is in the ON state, in step S2702, a process of subtracting 1 from the game counter is executed. Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the game counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, in step S2704, processing for switching the game output terminal 121a to the OFF state is executed. As described above, the game output terminal 121a indicating that one game has been executed is turned ON at the start of the game, and then turned OFF after a predetermined period of time (0.15 sec) has passed. The switching between the ON state and the OFF state is executed in a relatively short period of time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701 or step S2703, or if the process of step S2704 has been executed, the process advances to step S2705. The processing of steps S2705 to S2709 is processing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d in the reservation state.

That is, in step S2705, it is determined whether or not the reserved output flag has been set, indicating a reserved state. If it is in the reserved state, a process of subtracting 1 from the reserved output counter is executed in step S2706, and it is determined whether or not the reserved output counter has become 0 in step S2707. When the reserved output counter reaches 0, a process of clearing the reserved output flag is executed in step S2708, and a process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d is executed in step S2709. By such processing, the data display and hall computer of the gaming hall connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal board 121 can recognize that the AT mode has started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2705 or step S2707, or after the processing in step S2709 is executed, processing for updating other various counters and various timers is executed in step S2710, and then this timer update processing ends. do.

<State of external output>
The relationship between the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG.

First, the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when a win is established as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 62, rotation start processing (step S403) is executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts at timing ta0. After reaching the constant speed rotation (VN) at the timing ta1, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective at the timing ta2. Then, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at timing ta3, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at timing ta4. Incidentally, ta3 and ta4 indicate the operation of the third operated stop switch 42 to 44 and the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R (third reel). Therefore, after the stop operation of the third reel is performed at the timing of ta3, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes invalid.

When a win is established as a result of starting the AT mode at the timing of ta4, an AT start command at stop is output (step S1613), and an AT start effect is executed (step S2118, FIG. 55). Then, at the timing of ta4, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display of the game hall and the hall computer. is displayed, and data on the number of times of shifting to the AT mode is updated.

After that, at the timing of ta5, the first game of the AT mode is started, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and after reaching the constant speed rotation (VN) at the timing of ta6, it is stopped at the timing of ta7. Operation of the switches 42 to 44 becomes valid.

When the AT mode is started with a spin effect, step S2308 of the spin effect process (FIG. 50) is executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the timing of tb0. do. At timing tb1, the left reel 32L, which is the reference reel, reaches low speed rotation (VL) slower than the constant speed rotation (VN). At timings tb2 and tb3, the remaining reels (middle reel 32M, right reel 32R ) reaches low speed rotation (VL). In this case, the period from the start of rotation to timing tb3 corresponds to the first period (2 sec), and at timing tb3, low-speed rotation is performed in a state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is completed. It will be like that. The low-speed rotation is continued until timing tb4 when the second period (2.8 sec) elapses from the start of rotation.

At timing tb4, processing (step S2311) for decelerating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed, and at timing tb5 when the third period (0.2 sec) elapses from timing tb4, the second replay is performed. A symbol combination corresponding to winning or third replay winning is temporarily stopped on the activated line ML. In this case, an AT start command at the time of starting is output (step S2315), and an AT start effect at the time of starting is executed (step S2405, FIG. 57(b)). Then, at a timing tb6 slightly delayed from tb5, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display of the game hall and the hall computer.

The temporary stop state of the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay win or the third replay win is maintained from tb6 to timing tb7 when the fifth period (5 sec) elapses. Then, at timing tb7, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started by rotation start processing (step S403), reaching constant speed rotation (VN) at tb8, and stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at tb9. valid. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at tb10, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at tb11, and the result of the game started at tb0 is derived.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a win is established as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, the AT output terminal 121d of the external common terminal board 121 is turned ON, indicating that the AT mode has been entered. External output of information is performed. Furthermore, even when the pattern combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating performance during the preparation mode, the output terminal 121d for AT of the external collective terminal board 121 is turned ON, and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. This information is output externally. In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or provisionally stopped in the preparation mode, the output terminal 121d for AT is turned ON to output the fact that the AT mode has been shifted to the outside. and By doing so, the manager of the game hall or the like can clearly indicate that the shift to the AT mode has occurred not only by the results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R but also by the information output to the outside. It becomes possible to grasp the situation, and it becomes easy to identify a fraudulent act or the like that illegally enjoys the benefits of the AT mode.

In this embodiment, by shifting to the preparation mode, the AT preparation counter is set to set the game in which the spinning effect is performed, and when the AT preparation counter becomes 0, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. It is configured to set the timing to be set before executing the rotation effect. In other words, the AT output terminal 121d is configured to be set to the ON state at the time of transition to the preparation mode and at the start of the target game of the rotation effect as the timing before the process of turning the AT output terminal 121d to the ON state. By doing so, the execution timing of the processing (step S2709) for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d and the execution timing of the preprocessing for turning ON the ON state do not overlap. It is possible to preferably solve an increase in processing load due to duplication of processing.

Moreover, when temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode in the rotating effect, the timing is before the timing of the temporary stop and before starting the rotating effect. Then, the AT output terminal 121d is set to ON state in advance, and the timer is set so that the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when the symbol combination is temporarily stopped. That is, the process for temporarily stopping the symbol combination and the process for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d are separately executed in parallel (timer interrupt process, normal process). By setting, it becomes possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of processing errors through the distribution of the processing load.

Furthermore, since the setting of the timing for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d is performed in the external output setting first process prior to the spin effect process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the spin effect. The configuration is such that the above-described timing setting processing is completed in advance. By doing so, in a configuration that may require special control for drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, such as a rotation effect, the process for setting the output timing overlaps with any of the special controls. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in the processing load.

In addition, in the process of actually turning on the AT output terminal 121d, the AT output terminal 121d is turned on after determining that the reserved output counter has reached 0, which is an extremely simple configuration. Even with the configuration in which the output terminal 121d is in the ON state, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the processing load.

Incidentally, when the game is started, the game output terminal 121a is turned on, and after the on state is maintained for a predetermined period, the output terminal 121a for AT is turned on. The timing is set so as not to overlap with the timing for switching the game output terminal 121a to the OFF state, and is set as a timing after the timing for switching the game output terminal 121a to the OFF state. From this point of view as well, the processing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is set so as not to overlap with other processing, and it can be said that a device is taken to eliminate the increase in the processing load. .

In the present embodiment, the timing for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d in the reservation state is set to be slightly later than the timing for temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning as a result of the cancellation of the AT mode. are doing. In other words, in the rotation effect, the timing at which the symbol combination is temporarily stopped is the timing after 3 seconds (fourth period) after the start of the rotation effect, and the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d is turned on is It is the timing after 3.1 sec (sixth period) after the start of the rotating effect. By doing so, if for some reason there is a delay in the drive control of the stepping motor, or depending on the symbol positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R before the rotation starts, the set value ( 3 seconds later), it is possible to prevent the AT output terminal 121d from turning ON before the temporary stop.

As described above, when shifting to the preparation mode, by setting the game in which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON during the spinning effect after 40 games, and by setting the freeze flag at the start when 40 games have been completed. , in the first external output setting process, the timing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d during the game is set. In this case, it can be said that the game in which the AT output terminal 121d set in advance is set to the ON state can be brought forward when winning is made as a result of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode. However, even in this case, if the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON during the rotation effect (if the result for AT start is not winning), the freeze flag is set at the start, so external output is performed. In the first setting process, regardless of whether or not the front-loading has occurred, simply confirming the presence or absence of the freezing flag at the start and setting the timing for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d may be performed. It is possible to set the output timing of the AT output terminal 121d by a simple process.

Then, as a premise of the configuration in which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON by temporarily stopping the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning during the rotation effect, the preparation mode is performed. , the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON even when the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is established. With such a premise configuration, turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT during the spinning performance is expected to have the effect of making the output terminal 121d for AT seem to be turned ON in a normal game. Thus, it is possible to preferably expect the performance effect by performing the rotation performance.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, when the symbol combination corresponding to the result for starting the AT mode stops or temporarily stops on the activated line ML, the timing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is different from that in the first embodiment. , when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the stop or temporary stop start rotating.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing preparation mode processing in this modification.

In this modification, when the AT mode start result is won during the preparation mode, or when the preparation mode continuation upper limit is reached (steps S2813, S2822, and S2823), the process proceeds to step S2824. is different from the first embodiment in that the next game output flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. S1601 to S1623). The next game output flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT output terminal 121d should be turned ON.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In this modification, the fifth period (5 sec) has passed while the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay winning or the third replay winning is temporarily stopped (step S2917: YES), and the start freeze flag is set. After clearing (step S2918), the next game output flag is cleared in step S2919, and the start freeze flag is set by reaching the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode, and the lottery result of the game is AT. If the result of mode start is winning (step S2902: YES, step S2920: NO), the stand-by flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S2921, unlike the first embodiment. there is Other processes (steps S2901 to S2918, step S2920) are the same as the corresponding processes (steps S2301 to S2319) of the first embodiment. The standby flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it should wait to turn on the AT output terminal 121d even if the next game output flag is set.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing in this modification.

In this modification, when the lottery result of the next game that has reached the maximum number of games in the preparation mode is the result for starting the AT mode (step S3001: YES, step S3002: NO, step S3008: YES), After clearing the freeze flag at the start in step S3009, the standby flag is cleared in step S3010, and then the processing proceeds to set the start game flag in step S3003, unlike the first embodiment. ing. Other processes (steps S3001 to S3009) are the same as the corresponding processes (steps S1001 to S1001) of the first embodiment.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the first external output setting process in this modified example.

In this modification, similarly to the processing of steps S2601 to S2605, after executing the processing of steps S3101 to S3105, it is determined in step S3106 whether any freeze flag at the start is set. . If none of the freezing flags at the start has been set, it is determined in step S3107 whether or not the next game output flag has been set. is set. When the next game output flag is set and the standby flag is not set, it means that the game is the next game after the game in which winning was established as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode. In this case, in step S3109, after setting the AT output terminal 121d to the ON state, the first external output setting process is terminated.

If any of the start freeze flags is set in step S3106, the flow advances to step S3110 to execute processing for setting a reserved output flag. Then, in step S3111, the reserved output counter is set for a period slightly longer than the sum of the second period (2.8 sec), the third period (0.2 sec), and the fourth period (5 sec) (8 sec). After executing the process of inputting 5500 corresponding to a certain seventh period (approximately 8.2 sec), the external output setting first process ends. As described above, when the reserved output counter reaches 0, the AT output terminal 121d is turned on.

<State of external output>
How the AT output terminal 121d is turned on in this modification will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG.

Assume that the game is started at the timing tc0 in the preparation mode, and the lottery result of the game is a winning result for starting the AT mode. In this case, constant speed rotation (VN) is reached at the timing of tc1, and after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective at the timing of tc2, the third stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing of tc3. Then, the corresponding reel stops at the timing of tc4, and winning is established as a result for starting the AT mode. In this case, the AT start effect is executed at the timing of tc4 based on the winning result for starting the AT mode.

When the game next to the game ended at timing tc4 is started at timing tc5, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned on to display the data of the game hall. Information that the AT mode is started is output to the equipment and the hall computer.

When the AT mode is started with a spin effect, step S2908 of the spin effect process (FIG. 65) is executed, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the timing of td0. In this case, after the left reel 32L, which is the reference reel, reaches the low speed rotation (VL) slower than the constant speed rotation (VN) at the timing of td1, the remaining reels (middle reel 32M, The right reel 32R) reaches low-speed rotation (VL), and the low-speed rotation continues until timing td4 when the second period (2.8 sec) elapses from the start of rotation.

Then, at the timing of td5, the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, and the AT start effect at the start is executed.

The state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is temporarily stopped is maintained until timing td6 when the fifth period (5 sec) elapses from td5, and rotation start processing ( Rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started by step S403). Then, at timing td7, which is slightly delayed from timing td6, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display in the game hall and the hall computer.

After that, constant speed rotation (VN) is reached at the timing of td8, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective at the timing of td9, and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed at the timing of td10. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at the timing of , and the game result of the game started at the timing of td0 is derived.

As described above, the timing for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT is not the timing for stopping or temporarily stopping the symbol corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode, but after the symbol is stopped or temporarily stopped, each reel Since the rotation of 32L, 32M, and 32R is set to the timing of starting rotation, it is confirmed that the symbol corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. As a result, the work of confirming that the data display or the like will be updated will not be duplicated. In other words, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and the data display device and the like are trying to confirm that the data display is updated, and it is not possible to confirm that the symbol corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped. The event can be eliminated, and while the information output from these AT output terminals 121d and the outcomes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are associated with each other, it is possible to preferably expect the effect of each. becomes.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON after the CPU 102 confirms that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode has temporarily stopped. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In this modification, the rotation counter becomes 0 in step S3214, and the stepping motors are controlled so that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R temporarily stop after 0.2 sec (step S3211). After determining that it has elapsed, in step S3215, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize has actually stopped (temporarily stopped) on the activated line ML. If it is stopped (temporarily stopped), then in step S3216 the process of setting the AT start command at startup is executed, and then in step S3217 the process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d is executed. Through such processing, information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display of the game hall and the hall computer.

After that, in steps S3218 and S3219, a process of maintaining the stopped (temporarily stopped) state is performed, and in step S3220, the freeze flag at the start is cleared, and then the rotation effect process ends. In FIG. 70, the processing of steps S3201 to S3214 is the same as the processing of steps S2301 to S2314.

If a negative determination is made in step S3215, that is, even if 0.2 seconds have passed since the control in step S3211, the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the activated line ML. If not, it is determined in step S3221 whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (temporarily stopped). When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, that is, in spite of the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (temporarily stopped), the second re-game winning prize and the third re-game winning prize If the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped (temporarily stopped) on the effective line ML, then in step S3222 the first error command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the main rotation is performed. Terminate the production process.

If it is determined in step S3221 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are not stopped (temporarily stopped), then in step S3223 a process of inputting 671 corresponding to the eighth period (1 sec) to the rotation counter is executed. In the following step S3224, it is determined whether or not the rotation counter becomes 0 and the eighth period has elapsed. If the eighth period has elapsed, the second replay is actually performed again in step S3225. It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the win or the third replay win has stopped (temporarily stopped) on the activated line ML. If it is stopped (temporarily stopped), the process advances to step S3216 to execute the output setting of the AT start command at the time of starting, the process of turning ON the AT output terminal 121d (step S3217), etc., and then rotates. Terminate the production process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3225 and it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize is not stopped (temporarily stopped) on the effective line ML, the process proceeds to step S3226. to determine whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (temporarily stopped), and if they are stopped (temporarily stopped), a second error command is sent to the display control device 81 in step S3227. After executing the process of setting as an output object, the rotation effect process is terminated. If it is determined that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped (temporarily stopped) even though the eighth period has elapsed in step S3226, a third error command is issued in step S3228. is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the rotation effect processing is terminated.

FIG. 71(a) is a flowchart showing error notification processing in this modified example. The error notification process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 as one process of the other start effect setting process (step S2015) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 47).

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the first error command has been received. A symbol combination corresponding to a second re-game winning prize or a third re-game winning prize although all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a situation where the first error command is received and 3 seconds have passed since the start of the spinning performance. is not stopped, in step S3302, the process for performing the first error notification is executed, and then the error notification process is terminated. In the first error notification, as shown in FIG. 71(b1), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a girl character with her arms crossed and a question mark on her face, as well as one character with a question mark. The production is set.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the first error command has not been received, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not the second error command has been received. When the second error command is received, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the spinning effect, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped when 1 second has passed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is not stopped, the process for performing the second error notification is executed in step S3304, and then this error notification is executed. End the process. In the second error notification, as shown in FIG. 71(b2), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a girl character with her hands outstretched and a questioning face, and two characters with question marks. The production is set.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the second error command has not been received, it is determined in step S3305 whether or not the third error command has been received. All the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped when the third error command is received, and 3 seconds have passed since the start of the rotation performance, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped even when 1 second has passed. If not, in step S3306, the process for performing the third error notification is executed, and then the error notification process ends. In the third error notification, as shown in FIG. 71(b3), the auxiliary display section 65 is set to display the characters "Error Occurred, Please Call a Clerk".

That is, in the present modification, when performing the rotation production, on the condition that the symbol combination set to be temporarily stopped is actually temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, the production for starting the AT mode and the output terminal for AT 121d to output information indicating that the AT mode has started. By doing so, even though the pattern combination for starting the AT mode is not stopped due to some inconvenience in the rotation effect (for example, positional deviation of the reels, etc.), the AT mode start effect and the AT output It is possible to prevent a contradiction such that information is output via the terminal 121d.

Although the symbol combination set to be temporarily stopped is not stopped, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the AT mode start effect and the information output via the AT output terminal 121d are not performed. In addition, the freeze flag set at the start is not cleared. By doing so, for example, when the symbol combination for starting the AT mode does not stop due to, for example, the stop position of the reel being misaligned, a chance to stop it again in the next game is given. will be Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect for starting the AT mode using the effects of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R while not disturbing the smooth progress of the game.

Moreover, as described above, when the symbol combination for starting the AT mode does not stop by chance, the AT mode itself is started in the game, even though the spinning effect is executed again in the next game. (In the preparation mode process, the process of clearing the AT mode win flag and the process of inputting the initial number of games of 50 games are executed), and the AT mode starts even if the re-rotation effect is carried over as described above. is not carried over. By doing so, it is possible to ensure that the AT mode start effect using the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed more reliably, while preventing unfair advantage for the player. Become.

When setting the output of the error command in all or any of steps S3222, S3227, and S3228 in the above-described rotation effect processing, the error output terminal provided on the external centralized terminal board 121 is A process for turning ON may be executed. The configuration of the error output terminal is the same as that of the AT output terminal 121d, and when it is turned ON, the signal output from the error output terminal becomes a HI signal, and an error is sent to the data display of the game hall or the hall computer. Information about the status is output. The error output terminal is turned off when a predetermined operation (for example, an operation to open the front door 12) is performed by the manager of the game hall. By doing so, the manager of the game hall or the like can preferably identify the situation in which the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not stop and the game cannot be progressed when performing the spinning effect. becomes. In this case, in steps S3222 and S3227, the error command output setting is performed, but the error output terminal is not turned ON, and in step S3228, the error command output setting and the error output terminal are turned ON. may be configured.

<Modification 3>
The timing for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT may be the timing before the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the symbol combination can be stopped or temporarily stopped. It is good also as the start timing of the game which becomes.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the first external output setting process in this modified example.

The processing of steps S3401 to S3405 is the same as the processing of steps S2601 to S2605. In step S3406, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set. If any freeze-at-start flag is set, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the start game flag is set. If the start game flag is not set, the first external output setting process is terminated. If the start game flag is set in step S3407 and the result of the AT mode start is won during the preparation mode, or if any of the freeze flags at start is set in step S3406, step S3408 After executing the process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d at , the first external output setting process is terminated.

As already explained, when the configuration is such that the AT winning notification effect is performed as notification of the winning of the AT mode transition lottery and the transition to the preparation mode is performed, at least after the execution of the AT winning notification effect, the above-mentioned Even if the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON before the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or provisionally stopped, the number of times the AT mode is actually shifted and the shift to the AT mode are recorded. There is no discrepancy with the number of times the information is output. Therefore, even with the above arrangement, it is possible to suitably manage the number of AT mode transitions by the data display or hall computer connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal board 121. .

<Modification 4>
The timing for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT may be the timing after the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped, or the timing after the timing of the temporary stop. It may be the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this modification, as the above-mentioned predetermined condition, it is set that the first to sixth minor wins have been established a predetermined number of times after the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode has been temporarily stopped. there is

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the second external output setting process in this modified example.

The processing of steps S3501 to S3503 is the same as the processing of steps S2501 to S2503. In step S3504, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set, and if it is set and the game wins as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, the second game is executed in step S3505. It is determined whether or not a replay winning prize or a third replay winning prize has been established. When the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is established, in step S3506, after executing the processing of setting the reservation output flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the external output second processing is terminated. do. If a negative determination is made in step S3504 or step S3505, the second external output setting process is terminated. As described above, the reserved output flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT output terminal 121d is in a reserved state in which it is in the ON state.

In this modified example, the first external output setting process is not executed, and the reserved state managed by the reserved output counter is not set. Therefore, in the timer updating process in this modified example, the process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d when the reserved output counter becomes 0 is not executed.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In this modification, similarly to steps S2301 to S2318 in the first embodiment, after performing the processing for executing the first rotation effect and the second rotation effect in steps S3601 to S3618, step S3619 After executing the process of setting the reservation output flag at , the rotation effect process is terminated.

That is, in the present modification, when the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, the AT output terminal 121d is set to a reserved state in which it is turned ON.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing AT mode processing in this modified example.

In step S3701, it is determined whether or not the reserved output flag is set. If the reserved output flag is set, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the bell winning in the pressing order, that is, the winning of the first to sixth minor winnings has been established. When the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination have been established, in step S3703, a process of adding 1 to the winning counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The winning counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the 1st to 6th minor wins have been established after the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode has been stopped or provisionally stopped.

After executing the process of step S3703, it is determined whether or not the winning counter has reached 5 as a predetermined number in step S3704. If the winning counter is 5, a process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d is executed in step S3705, and a process of clearing the reserved output flag is executed in step S3706. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S3701, S3702, and S3704, or if the process of step S3707 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3708. The processing of steps S3708 to S3712 is the same as the processing of steps S1501 to S1505.

That is, in the present modification, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, the AT output terminal 121d is set to the ON state and set to the reserved state, and in the reserved state, the first small When the winning combination to the sixth minor winning combination are established five times, the AT output terminal 121d is set to the ON state assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Even in this way, the number of times of shifting to the AT mode can be preferably grasped by the data display or the hall computer. In addition, by outputting information indicating that the game has shifted to the AT mode after the game has started in the AT mode, the slot machine 10 notifies that the AT mode will start. After that, the data display is updated, and in the configuration where the effect of the transition to the AT mode is performed at multiple places, the effect timing at each place does not overlap. It is possible to preferably avoid an overlooked event by performing the effects at different locations.

In addition, not only when the winning result for starting the AT mode is established as a result of the game, but also when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating effect as described above, the reservation state is changed. , it is possible to give a strong impression that the rotation effect is an effect necessary for the progress of the game, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the rotation effect.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped based on the stop switches 42-44 in the rotation effect. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this embodiment.

In step S3801, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the first start or the freeze flag at the second start is set. It is determined whether or not the result for the start is winning. If none of the freeze flags at the start is set in step S3801, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. In step S3802, if the lottery result of the current game is not winning for starting the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3803. In addition, if the lottery result of this game is the result of winning the AT mode start result, it is determined in step S3829 whether or not it is a rotation effect in the preparation mode, and if it is in the preparation mode (the AT preparation counter is greater than 0), the process proceeds to step S3803. When the AT preparation counter is 0 in step S3829, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. The processes of steps S3801, S3802, and S3829 are the same as the corresponding processes in the first embodiment.

In step S3803, a process of setting a rotation effect command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. As already described, the display control device 81 that has received the rotation effect command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the rotation effect (FIG. 57(a)) is performed (step S2403). In the subsequent step S3804, a process of setting a pseudo-game command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The pseudo-game command is a temporary stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 during rotation production, and a stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the normal stop switches 42 to 44. (Steps S404 to S413) are notified through the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. so that the player can clearly distinguish the operation during the rotation effect and the temporary stop. is a command for It should be noted that, in the following description, the operation and temporary stop during the rotation production is also referred to as "pseudo game", and the operation and temporary stop during the rotation production are also referred to as "pseudo game information". In addition, in order to distinguish the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step S404 to step S413) based on the normal operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the pseudo game, the normal operation and stop are also called "normal game". called.

By the way, there are the following differences between "regular game" and "pseudo game". That is, in the normal game, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result of the game stops on the activated line ML, so that a privilege (game value) corresponding to the lottery result is given, while in the pseudo game, the lottery of the game. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the result is stopped or temporarily stopped on the activated line ML, the privilege (game value) corresponding to the lottery result is not given. That is, the normal game is a game to be determined in the payout determination process (step S414), while the pseudo-game can be said to be a game not to be determined in the payout determination process.

In the subsequent step S3805, a process of inputting 2013 corresponding to the ninth period (3 sec) to the rotation counter is executed. Then, in step S3805, a stepping motor is controlled so that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. In this case, the stepping motor is controlled so as to reach constant speed rotation (VN) at the same acceleration as in the normal rotation start process (step S403). Then, in step S3807, it is determined whether or not the rotation counter has reached 0, and the process waits in step S3807 until it reaches 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3807 and the ninth period has elapsed since all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R started rotating, pseudo-activation processing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in step S3808. In this pseudo-validation process, the state in which the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not accepted is changed to the state in which the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is accepted. Processing is performed to change from a non-detection state to a detection state, or to change from a state in which even if the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a detect the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the operation is not valid to a state in which the operation is valid.

In the subsequent step S3809, a process of setting the operation instruction command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The operation instruction command is for notifying the player that the above-described pseudo activation process has been performed and that it is time to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo game using the rotation effect. This is a command for performing an effect (operation instruction effect) on the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, or the like. Then, in step S3810, a process of inputting 3365 corresponding to the tenth period (5 sec) to the rotation counter is executed.

In the subsequent step S3811, based on the detection results of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, it is determined whether or not the stop switches 42-44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated. When none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are already temporarily stopped even if they are operated, In step S3812, it is determined whether or not the rotation counter has reached 0. If it has not reached 0 and the tenth period has not elapsed, the process returns to step S3811.

If any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated in step S3811, the process advances to step S3813 to execute pseudo invalidation processing for the stop switches 42 to 44 that have been operated this time. Specifically, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time is changed from a state in which the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a detect to a state in which they are not detected, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a detect the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. When the operation is performed, the state of valid operation is changed to the state of not valid operation. Then, in step S3814, a process of setting the pseudo operation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the pseudo operation command executes a process for performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 on the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, and the like.

After executing the processing of step S3814, it is determined in step S3815 whether or not the first start freeze flag is set. When the freeze flag at the first start is set, in step S3816, the pattern that will be the second replay winning prize is stopped on the effective line ML of the reel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. A process for driving and controlling the stepping motor is performed. On the other hand, if the first freeze flag at start is not set in step S3815 and the second freeze flag at start is set, then in step S3817, the stop switches 42 to 44 that have been operated this time correspond to the A stepping motor is driven and controlled so as to stop the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third regame on the activated line ML of the reel to be played.

Here, in the drive control processing of step S3816 and step S3817, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the symbol for the second re-game winning or the symbol for the third re-game winning is stopped on the activated line ML. Let That is, in the normal game, it was possible to stop the symbols separated by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 were operated on the effective line ML, but in the pseudo game, the stop switches 42 to 44. Regardless of the operation timing of , the target pattern is stopped on the effective line ML, and the patterns separated by a maximum of 19 patterns are set to be stopped on the effective line ML.

After executing the process of step S3816 or step S3817, the process proceeds to step S3818 to determine whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are temporarily stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not temporarily stopped, the rotation counter becomes 0 in step S3819, and after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is validated in the pseudo game (step S3808), the tenth It is determined whether or not 5 sec has elapsed as the period, and if 5 sec has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3820.

In step S3820, it is determined whether or not the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated. If not, the process returns to step S3811 and waits until the stop switches 42-44 are operated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3820 that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated, the rotation counter is cleared to 0 in step S3821.

If it is determined that the rotation counter has reached 0 in steps S3812 or S3819, or if the rotation counter has been set to 0 based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 in step S3821, the process proceeds to step S3822. In step S3822, a process of temporarily stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are not stopped is executed. That is, the stepping motor is driven and controlled so as to temporarily stop the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning or the symbol corresponding to the third re-game winning on the activated line ML. After that, in step S3823, confirmation processing is repeatedly executed to confirm that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have temporarily stopped.

Since all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are temporarily stopped, an affirmative determination is made in step S3823, and the process proceeds to step S3824. If it is determined in step S3818 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S3824. In step S3824, a process of setting an AT start command at startup as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Then, in step S3825, the AT output terminal 121d is turned on, and in steps S3826 and S3827, the temporarily stopped state is maintained for the fifth period (5 sec). Then, after executing the process of clearing the freeze flag at the start set in step S3828, the rotation effect process is terminated. The processing of steps S3824 to S3828 is the same as the processing of steps S3216 to S3220.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not a rotation effect command is received, and if received, the preparation mode flag is cleared in step S3902, and processing for setting rotation effect is executed in step S3903. The processing of steps S3901 to S3903 is the same as the processing of steps S2401 to S2403.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, or after executing the process of step S3903, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not the pseudo-game command is received. When the pseudo-game command is received, in step S3905 the pseudo-game effect is set to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like.

As a pseudo-game effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 78(a), an effect of displaying a pseudo-game image GP with characters such as "Pseudo-game in progress" in a predetermined area (upper right in the figure) in the auxiliary display section 65. is set. The pseudo-game image GP is set to a size that allows the player to grasp that the image is displayed and the characters (for example, the size of the characters during the pseudo-game is 20pt or more). It is

If a negative determination is made in step S3904, or if the processing of step S3905 has been executed, it is determined in step S3906 whether or not the above operation instruction command has been received. When the operation instruction command is received, a process of setting to perform a pseudo effective effect is executed in step S3907. The pseudo-validation effect is an effect for letting the player know that the pseudo-validation process of step S3808 has been performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. The stop lamps 42b to 44b built in 44 are switched from the off state to the on state.

In the following step S3908, according to the type of the rotation effect this time, the operation instruction effect corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is set to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like. Execute. That is, when performing the first rotating effect, an operation instruction effect for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the second replay winning prize is performed, and when performing the second rotating effect, the third replay effect is performed. To perform an operation instruction performance for notifying the pressing order corresponding to game winning.

As the operation instruction effect set in step S3908, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the second replay winning prize or the third An effect is set to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the replay winning, and to notify the symbols for the second replay winning and the symbols for the third replay winning. In this case, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 notified in the operation instruction effect is the operation order for the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning when the normal replies A to C are won. Whether or not to report the operation sequence corresponding to C is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.

In this way, the same effect as the effect that is executed when winning is achieved as a result of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode is also executed in the pseudo game in the rotation effect. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned pseudo-game image GP is displayed in the pseudo-game, the situation where the symbol corresponding to the result winning for starting the AT mode in the normal game should be stopped, and the pattern for starting the AT mode in the pseudo-game The player can clearly distinguish both situations by confirming the pseudo-game image GP while performing an effect that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the situation in which the symbols corresponding to the winning result should be stopped. It becomes possible.

If a negative determination is made in step S3906, or if the process of step S3908 has been executed, the process advances to step S3909. In step S3909, it is determined whether or not a pseudo operation command has been received. If the pseudo operation command is received and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, in step S3910, the stop lamps 42b to 44b corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time are turned off from the on state. By doing so, the process of ending the above-mentioned pseudo effective effect is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the corresponding symbol on the activated line ML is temporarily stopped. Therefore, in step S3910, for example, a sound effect corresponding to the temporary stop is emitted from the speaker 64, or the operation instruction presentation of the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated in correspondence with the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. You may perform the processing which does.

If a negative determination is made in step S3909, or if the process of step S3910 has been executed, the process advances to step S3911. In step S3911, it is determined whether or not the AT start command is received at the time of starting, and if it is received, at step S3912, the AT start effect at the time of starting is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like. Execute the processing to be set. The AT start effect at the time of starting is, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 57(b) as described above.

In the following step S3913, a process for ending the pseudo-game effect is executed. Specifically, processing for ending the display of the pseudo game image GP is performed. In the subsequent step S3914, when the pseudo effective effect is continued, a process for terminating it is executed. Specifically, when the AT start command is received while any or all of the stop lamps 42b to 44b built in the stop switches 42 to 44 remain lit, When the rotation counter is set to 0 by operating the credit input switch 56 or the like and the machine is temporarily stopped, processing is performed to switch the lighted stop lamps 42b to 44b to the lighted state. When a negative determination is made in step S3911, or after executing the process of step S3914, the rotation effect process is terminated.

The flow of rotation effects in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the game in which the rotation effect is executed at the timing of te1 is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate, the pseudo game effect is started, and the pseudo game image GP is displayed. After the rotational speeds of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached constant speed rotation (VN) at timing te2, when 3 sec as the ninth period has elapsed from the start of rotation at timing te3, the pseudo-activation process is executed. , the stop lamps 42b to 44b of the stop switches 42 to 44 are turned on to notify that the pseudo activation process has been performed. Further, at the timing te3, an operation instruction effect is executed, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged to stop the second re-game winning or third re-game winning symbols.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at timing te4, timing te6, and timing te8, respectively, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at timing te5, timing te7, and timing te9, respectively. The symbol combination corresponding to the 2nd re-game win or the 3rd re-game win is temporarily stopped on the activated line ML. Incidentally, the pseudo effective effect ends when each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, and finally the pseudo effective effect ends at the timing te8 which is the operation timing of the third stop switch 42 to 44. It will be.

Then, at the timing te9, the AT start effect at the time of starting is executed, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON to output information indicating that the shift to the AT mode has occurred. The state in which the symbol combination is temporarily stopped is maintained for 5 seconds, and at the timing of te10, the rotation start processing (step S403) in the game started at the timing of te1 is executed, and the reels 32L and 32M are executed. , 32R start to rotate (normal game starts). After that, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enabled at the timing of te12, and when the final stop operation is performed at the timing of te13, the final reel is stopped at the timing of te14, and the game started at the timing of te1. ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the case of temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode in the rotating effect, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is used as a trigger to temporarily stop the symbol combination. As a result, it is possible to give a stronger impression that the player has won the start of the AT mode by his/her own operation.

And, in this way, based on the provisional stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R by their own operation in the pseudo-game, information output from the AT output terminal 121d is performed, so that their own It is possible to give the impression that the player has won the start of the AT mode by the operation, and strongly give the impression that the pseudo-game is a game indispensable for the progress of the game (start of the AT mode).

<Modification 1>
In the above-described second embodiment, the pseudo-game is set at the start of the game, and the normal game is performed after the pseudo-game. FIG. 80(a) shows an example in which a pseudo-game is performed between normal games in one game.

Specifically, with tf1 to tf7 as one game, when the start lever 41 is operated at tf1, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate to start the normal game, followed by tf2. to validate the operation of the stop switches 42-44. Then, for example, among the plurality of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the first reel and the second reel are stopped, and at the timing of tf3 when the first reel and the second reel are stopped, Temporarily suspend the normal game. In this case, for example, on the first reel and the second reel, the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode may be stopped.

Then, at the subsequent timing tf4, the pseudo-game in-progress display and the pseudo-valid in-progress display are started, and the pseudo-validation process is executed to perform the pseudo-game. In this case, the first reel and the second reel are already stopped as described above, and the target of the pseudo-game is the unstopped third reel.

In the pseudo game, the stop operation is performed for the third reel, and the third reel is temporarily stopped at the timing of tf5, and the temporarily stopped symbols and the stopped symbols of the first reel and the second reel. Thus, for example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is formed, the AT mode start effect is executed at timing tf5, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. set to In addition, at tf5, the pseudo invalidation process is executed, and the display during pseudo-game and the display during pseudo-effective are terminated. After that, at tf6 when the series of AT mode start effects ends, the third reel is started to rotate again, and the operation of the stop switch 43 is validated, and at tf7, based on the operation of the stop switch 43 The middle reel 32M is stopped, and the game started at tf1 ends.

In this way, by performing the pseudo-game between the normal game and the normal game, the symbols temporarily stopped in the pseudo-game and the symbols stopped in the normal game executed before that are displayed. is used to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning results for starting the AT mode, etc., to associate the start effect of the AT mode, the information output from the output terminal 121d for AT, and the stop result. It is possible to realize a great playability.

In this case, as follows, while the symbols that will win the lottery result of the target game for which the rotation effect is to be executed are stopped on the activated line ML, the symbols that will win as a result of the AT mode start will be placed at positions different from the activated line ML. It is also possible to temporarily stop the combination.

That is, as shown in FIG. 81(a), when it is determined in step S3951 that any of the freeze flags at the start of the rotation effect process is set, the lottery result of the current game is determined in step S3952. It is determined whether or not it is a normal reply A to C, and if it is a normal reply A to C, the process proceeds to step S3829. If it is not the normal reply A to C, it is determined in step S3953 whether or not the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning. If the pressing order bell is not won, the process proceeds to the above step S3803, and the process for performing the first rotation effect and the second rotation effect as a pseudo game is executed at the start of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the target game of the rotation effect is the push order bell winning, the affirmative determination is made in step S3953, and the process of setting the pseudo game flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step S3954 is executed. Then, after executing the process of setting the pseudo-game command as an output target to the display control device 81 in the following step S3955, the rotation effect process is terminated.

In this case, the spin effect as a pseudo-game is not executed at the start of the game, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate in the spin start process (step S403) in the reel control process. In the display control device 81 that has received the midway pseudo-game command, based on the pressing order notification command based on the pressing order bell winning, which is the lottery result of this game, and the midway pseudo-game command, for example, FIG. As shown in , the operation instruction notification aiming at the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is executed, and the operation order in the operation instruction notification is changed from the first minor winning prize to the sixth in the pressing order bell this time. To notify the operation sequence corresponding to the winning of a small winning combination. In other words, the characters with patterns corresponding to the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize (in the figure, the symbols corresponding to the third replay winning of the “white 7”, “white 7”, and “red 7” patterns character) is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor winning combination of the middle reverse push bells 1 and 2 is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as the operation order.

In this case, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated based on the operation instruction notification, the right reel 32R is used as the first reel and operated aiming at the "red 7" symbol, and the left reel 32L is used as the second reel and operated as "white". 7" symbol is operated, as shown in FIG. 81(d), the "bell" symbol is tense up on the upward right line L5, and the fourth minor winning combination can be established, and the downward right line L4. Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the third replay win is brought to a state in which it can be temporarily stopped.

In the reel control process, as shown in FIG. 81(b), the reel stop process is executed in step S411, it is determined that all the reels are not stopped in step S412, and stop information No. 2 is displayed in step S413. After executing the setting process, in step S3961, it is determined whether or not the second reel has stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the current reel stop processing in step S411 is the second reel stop processing. If it is the stop processing of the second reel, in step S3962, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned pseudo-game flag is set, and if it is set, in step S3963 the pseudo-game on the way After clearing the flag, a process of setting the pseudo-game command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3964. After that, the process for performing a pseudo-game of steps S3808 to S3828 is executed, and after executing the process of starting the rotation of the third reel in step S3965, the process returns to step S404. Moreover, when negative determination is made in step S3961 or step S3962, the process returns to step S404 without executing the processing for the pseudo-game.

In the display control device 81, based on the pseudo-game command set in step S3964, as shown in FIG. 81(e), the pseudo-game image GP is displayed to start the pseudo-game display. In this case, as described above, since the first reel and the second reel have already stopped in the normal game, the notification that the "white 7" symbol should be aimed at the middle reel 32M is displayed in the above pseudo-game image. Displayed with GP. Then, based on the notification, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, in the rotation effect processing, stop control for temporarily stopping the middle reel 32M is executed (step S3816, step S3817), and all the reels are temporarily stopped (step S3818 : YES), an AT start command is set at the time of start-up, and processing is performed to turn ON the AT output terminal 121d.

Then, after the symbol combination corresponding to the third replay win is stopped or temporarily stopped on the downward right line L4 and is maintained for 5 seconds, rotation of the third reel is started in step S3965 (Fig. 81(g)). In this case, when the normal game is resumed and the third reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. is done.

As described above, by using the symbols stopped in the normal game and the symbols temporarily stopped in the pseudo game to display the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode, It is possible to reduce the number of stop operations in one game than the configuration in which all stop operations are performed in a pseudo game, and the AT while giving a privilege corresponding to the lottery result of the game in the normal game. The smooth progress of the game is realized in a configuration in which the pattern combination for starting the mode is displayed to start the AT mode, the effect of the start of the AT mode is performed, and the information is output to the outside.

In this case, for the reel that has performed the pseudo-game, after performing the effect etc. based on the pseudo-game, it is rotated again and the stop operation is performed in the normal game, and after the stop based on the stop operation of the normal game , a payout determination process, a winning result response process, and the like are executed. In other words, even if the stop result of the normal game is used in the pseudo game, the opportunity to execute the normal game is secured for all the reels, and the playability of the normal game is not compromised. Therefore, the production effect of the pseudo-game can be favorably expected without requiring special control, operation, etc. in the normal game.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the pseudo-game is usually executed after the game. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(b), one game is from tg1 to tg8, and when the start lever 41 is operated at tg1, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate and normal A game is started, and the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are validated at tg2. Then, when the final stop operation in the normal game is performed at tg3, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. For example, the lottery result of the game started at tg1 is a winning result for starting the AT mode in the preparation mode, and the result of stopping by the final stop operation at tg3 is not a winning result for starting the AT mode. In this case, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at tg3, the game is not ended as it is, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate at tg4, and a pseudo-game and pseudo-game-in-progress display are displayed. let it start. Then, at tg5, the pseudo-validation process is executed and the display during pseudo-validation is started, and at tg6, based on the final stop operation in the pseudo-game, the pseudo-invalidation process is executed and the display during pseudo-validation is ended. . In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, at the temporary stop timing tg7, the AT start effect is executed, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. After that, at tg8, the display during pseudo-game is ended, and the game started at tg1 is ended.

After the execution of the pseudo-game, for example, after tg7 and before tg8, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started to rotate, and then the symbol combination stopped in the normal game The symbol stopped after the operation) may be stopped again on the effective line ML, and then one game may be finished. In this case, after the re-stop, the payout determination process and the winning result handling process may be executed.

After execution of the pseudo-game, it may be configured to execute the payout determination process and the winning result corresponding process with the symbols stopped in the pseudo-game without being stopped again as described above. In this case, it is preferable that the CPU 102 temporarily stores symbols and the like that are stopped in the normal game, and executes payout determination processing and winning result handling processing. By doing so, a benefit that does not correspond to the finally stopped stop roll (stop roll stopped in a pseudo-game) is given by the payout determination process, etc., and novel game characteristics are provided. Realization is possible.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, a modified example of the configuration for notifying that it is a pseudo-game will be described.

FIG. 82(a) shows an example of notifying that it is a pseudo-game by the instruction monitor 68 as a section indicator. Specifically, in the instruction monitor 68, a ninth display segment N9 is provided in addition to the first display segment N1 to the eighth display segment N8. The ninth display segment N9 can be individually turned on/off by the main controller 101, similarly to the first display segment N1 to the eighth display segment N8. In addition, on the surface of the instruction monitor 68, a print such as "Pseudo-game in progress" is printed so as to point to the ninth display segment N9. It will be in a state in which a notification to that effect is performed, and a notification to the effect that it is not a pseudo game will be performed (a notification to the effect that it is a pseudo game will not be performed) by turning off the ninth display segment N9.

In this way, the notification of the pseudo game is performed by the instruction monitor 68 directly controlled by the main control device 101, thereby improving the reliability of the notification of the pseudo game. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game while clearly grasping the difference between the normal game and the pseudo-game, and in one game, the benefits obtained in the normal game and the profits obtained in the pseudo-game It is possible to suppress the loss of understanding.

In other words, even the notification that it is a pseudo-game executed on the display control device 81 side can be used for the effect. For example, it may be configured to notify that it is a pseudo-game in the normal game, or may be configured to notify that it is a pseudo-game under predetermined conditions during the normal game, for example, the possibility that a pseudo-game will be performed After announcing that it is a pseudo-game during normal play of a certain game, after that, the pseudo-game may or may not be performed in the game.

FIG. 82(b) shows an example in which a pseudo-game is notified by a movable accessory as displacement means capable of being displaced between a first position and a second position different from the first position. Specifically, a movable accessory 78 having the word "pseudo" printed on the surface is provided, and the accessory 78 is positioned at the back of the upper lamp 63 as the first position (FIG. 82(b1)), The display control device 81 controls a drive unit (not shown) in front of the auxiliary display unit 65 as the second position (FIG. 82(b2)) so that it can be displaced. When the accessory 78 is placed at the first position, the accessory 78 becomes invisible or difficult to be seen by the player, and when the accessory 78 is placed at the second position, it is placed at the first position. Also, the accessory 78 becomes easier to visually recognize, and more specifically, it becomes visible. Then, the display control device 81 displaces the accessory 78 to the second position to notify that it is a pseudo-game, and displaces the accessory 78 to the first position to indicate that it is not a pseudo-game. It will be in a state where notification is performed (notification that it is a pseudo game is not performed).

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which notification of a pseudo-game is performed by the action of the accessory 78, it becomes difficult for the player to miss the notification, and while clearly grasping the difference between the normal game and the pseudo-game, It is possible to enhance the effect of playing a game.

<Third Embodiment>
In the above-described first and second embodiments, in the case where the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, and when the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode, the AT mode is started and the player wins the prize. When a prize is not established as a result of starting the AT mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in a rotating performance to start the AT mode. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if a prize is won as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, and even if winning is established as a result of starting the AT mode, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. If not, the pattern combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating effect, and the AT mode is started. For example, the configuration is such that the AT mode is not started without executing the rotating effect.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), in the present embodiment, in addition to the first to twelfth regames, a thirteenth regame is set as a prize mode. In the thirteenth replay, winning is established when the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. When the thirteenth replay win is established, as shown in FIG. 83(c), all "red 7" symbols stop on the middle line L2.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the present embodiment, when a winning combination is won with an index value IV=1 to 3, the 13th replay is also won in addition to the winning combination of the first embodiment. . That is, if the normal replay A is won with the index value IV=1, the 13th regame will be won in addition to the first to fourth regame wins. Also, when normal reply B is won with index value IV=2, the 13th regame is won in addition to the 1st to 4th regame wins, the 6th regame win, and the 6th regame win. Then, when normal reply C is won with index value IV=3, the 13th regame is won in addition to the 1st to 3rd regame wins, the 5th regame win, and the 6th regame win. .

In this embodiment, as a result for starting the AT mode, the above-described various re-games are set in which a prize can be won when a win is made with index values IV=1 to 3. FIG. In other words, in this embodiment, the AT mode can be started when the normal reply A is won in the preparation mode and the 1st re-game winning to the 4th re-game winning or the 13th re-game winning is established. Yes, AT mode can be started when normal replay B is won in preparation mode and 1st to 4th regame wins, 6th regame wins, or 13th regame wins are established. , and in the preparation mode, when the normal reply C is won and the 1st re-game winning to the 3rd re-game winning, the 5th re-game winning, the 6th re-game winning, or the 13th re-game winning is established It is set as AT mode can be started.

However, in this embodiment, even if various re-game winnings are established in the case where the normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode, the 13th re-game is set as the first condition among the predetermined conditions. When a prize is established and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of the 13th re-game winning is a specific operation mode as the second condition among the predetermined conditions, rotation effect is not performed. , and the AT mode is not started. Then, in the case where the normal replay A to C is won, if the replay winning other than the 13th replay is established and the first condition out of the predetermined conditions is not satisfied, or if the 13th replay winning is not satisfied Even if it is satisfied, the AT mode is started when the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not the specific operation mode at the time of winning and the second condition among the predetermined conditions is not satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the specific operation mode as the above-mentioned second condition is set to the stop switches 42 to 44 such that the number of sliding frames of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning the 13th regame is equal to or less than a predetermined number (1). It is set as an operation mode. In other words, when normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode, the AT mode starts when the 13th replay winning is established so that the number of sliding frames of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes 1 or 0 However, when the 13th re-game winning is established so that the number of sliding frames of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes 2 to 4, the AT mode is started after the spinning effect.

More specifically, when the 13th replay winning prize is established, as shown in FIG. 83(d), the 12th "watermelon" symbol to the 14th "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L are displayed in the middle stage. , and the stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the 13th "red clam" symbol to the 15th "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M reach the upper row, and the 12th symbol on the right reel 32R. It is necessary to operate the stop switch 44 at the timing when the 15th "BAR" pattern reaches the upper stage from the 1st "ark shell" pattern. On the other hand, in order to establish the 13th replay winning so as to satisfy the above predetermined condition, the 13th "young man" symbol to the 14th "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the middle row. The stop switch 42 is operated at the timing, and the stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 15th "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M reaches the upper row, and the 14th symbol on the right reel 32R. It is necessary to operate the stop switch 44 at the timing when the fifteenth "BAR" symbol from the "red 7" symbol of 1 reaches the upper stage. The drawing range is defined as the range of symbols that enables the 13th re-game winning regardless of the second condition, and the range of symbols that enables the 13th re-game winning to satisfy the second condition. Assuming that the range is a success determination range, it is set so that the success determination range is narrower than the pull-in range (a range with a smaller number of symbols).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the start of the AT mode is avoided by the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when establishing the 13th regame winning prize when the normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode. It has a configuration that allows In this way, a player who wants to continue the preparation mode as long as possible can use the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44 to make full use of the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the normal reply A to C is won in the preparation mode. 13 replay wins are established, and it is possible to greatly improve the game performance during the preparation mode.

However, even in this embodiment, there is an upper limit to the number of continuous games in the preparation mode. is configured to start.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration and the like for realizing the above-described game characteristics will be described.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT start notification process is one process in the lottery result correspondence process executed by the main controller 101 .

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is one of the normal replies A to C. If one of the normal replies A to C is won, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 and the number of games in the preparation mode has not reached the upper limit. If normal replies A to C are won in a situation where the number of games in the preparation mode has not reached the upper limit, processing for setting a start game flag is executed in step S4003. Then, in step S4004, after executing a process of setting the avoidance instruction command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT start notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the avoidance instruction command outputs an avoidance instruction effect to the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. to avoid the start of the AT mode by establishing the 13th regame winning prize while establishing a predetermined condition. control to do so. If a negative determination is made in step S4001 or step S4002, the AT start notification process is terminated.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing preparation mode processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the preparation mode process is one process in the winning result handling process executed by the main controller 101 .

In steps S4101 to S4105, similar to the processing in steps S1601 to S1605, processing for upgrading from the first AT mode to the second AT mode is executed. In the following step S4106, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT preparation counter is executed in correspondence with the end of the game. Then, in step S4107, it is determined whether or not the AT preparation counter has become 0.

If the AT preparation counter is not 0, it is determined in step S4108 whether or not the start game flag is set. If the starting game flag is set and the game is a game in which normal replies A to C are won during the preparation mode, in step S4109, various replays that can be won when normal replies A to C are won are performed. Among them, it is determined whether or not the 13th replay win has been established. When the thirteenth replay winning prize is established and the first condition among the predetermined conditions is established, a process of setting the start avoidance first command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4110. do. The display control device 81 that has received the start avoidance first command performs a first avoidance effect to the effect that the first condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode has been satisfied by the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, or the like. to control.

In the following step S4111, a process of grasping the number of sliding frames of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the process of calculating the number of sliding frames is performed in step S408 in the reel control process, the calculated number of sliding frames can be individually stored in association with each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. More specifically, the various counter areas 106e are provided with a left slide number counter, a middle slide number counter, and a right slide number counter corresponding to the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. input. At step S4111, it is possible to grasp the number of slips of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the current game by grasping the values of the slip number counters. Each of these sliding number counters is cleared to 0 at the end of the game.

In step S4112, it is determined whether or not the number of sliding frames of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is 0 or 1. That is, if any of the sliding number counters is 2 or more, a negative determination is made in step S4112.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4112, processing for clearing the start game flag is executed in step S4113. Then, in step S4114, after executing a process of setting the start avoidance second command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this preparation mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the start avoidance second command performs an avoidance second effect to the effect that the second condition out of the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode has been satisfied by the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, or the like. to control. In this case, the process for starting the AT mode is not executed, and the AT mode is not started.

On the other hand, in spite of the start game flag being set in step S4109, if the 13th regame winning prize is not established and normal replies A to C are won during the preparation mode. If a replay win other than the 13th replay is established, that is, if the first condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode is not established, the process proceeds to step S4115. Also, in step S4112, if any of the sliding number counters is 2 or more, and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the case of establishing the 13th regame winning prize is not the specific operation mode, that is, in the AT mode Even if the second condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4115.

In step S4115, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S4116, a process of adding 50 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step S4117, a process of clearing the start game flag is executed. In the following step S4118, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode flag is set, and if it is set, in step S4119 the process of setting the freeze flag at the first start is executed, and then the preparation mode is set. end the processing. If the second AT mode flag is set instead of the first AT mode flag, the processing for setting the second start freeze flag is performed in step S4120, and then the preparation mode processing is terminated. In other words, in the game in which the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode, if either the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the rotating effect is performed. AT mode is started.

If it is determined in step S4107 that the AT preparation counter is 0, it is determined in step S4121 whether or not the first AT mode flag is set. Then, in step S4123, the first AT mode flag is cleared and the second AT mode flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S4121, or after executing the process of step S4123, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S4124, and the process of adding 50 to the AT game counter is executed in step S4125. After that, in step S4120, the process of setting the second start freeze flag is executed. These processes when the upper limit number of games is reached in the preparation mode are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, preparation mode effect setting processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86(a). The preparation mode effect setting process is a process executed in step S2202 in the AT start process (FIG. 49).

In step S4201, processing for updating the display of the number of remaining games is executed. The display of the number of remaining games is a display for notifying the number of games until the preparation mode reaches the upper limit number of games. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. A message such as "remaining 35" is displayed in a predetermined area. The display of the remaining number of games can be updated by 1 from "40 remaining" to "0 remaining". process.

In subsequent step S4202, it is determined whether or not an avoidance instruction command has been received. If the avoidance instruction command has been received and the lottery result of the current game is normal reply A to C winning as a result for starting AT mode, in step S4203 the avoidance instruction effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. Executes the processing set to be performed in . As the avoidance instruction presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. The 13th re-game win should be established to establish the first condition, and the 13th re-game should be won in a specific operation mode (an operation mode in which a prize is won with 0 tops or 1 tops) and the second condition should be satisfied. Inform what should be established. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, or after the processing of step S4203 is executed, it is determined whether or not the avoidance second effect flag is set in step S4204. Terminate the effect setting process.

Next, the avoidance effect setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86(b). The avoidance effect setting process is a process executed as one process of step S2222 in the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 48).

In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the preparation mode flag is set. If the preparation mode flag is set, the flow advances to step S4212 to determine whether or not the start avoidance first command has been received. When the start avoidance first command is received, the thirteenth replay winning is established, and the first condition is established, the avoidance first effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. in step S4213. Executes the processing that is set to be performed by As the first avoidance effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the 13th regame winning is established, three "Red 7" symbols are displayed side by side and stopped together on the middle line L2. , and notifies that the 13th replay winning prize has been established, and displays characters such as "JUDGE!!", after this, whether or not the second condition is established is notified by an effect. make an announcement.

After executing the processing of step S4213, it is determined whether or not the start avoidance second command has been received in step S4214. When the start avoidance second command is received, the thirteenth replay wins in the specific operation mode of 0 piece bet or 1 piece bet, and the second condition is satisfied, the avoidance second effect is performed in step S4215. After executing the flag setting process, the avoidance effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4211, step S4212 or step S4114, the avoidance effect setting process is terminated.

By setting the avoidance second effect flag in step S4215, the determination in step S4204 is affirmative in the preparation mode effect setting process for the next game. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4204, the avoidance second effect flag is cleared in step S4205, and processing for setting the avoidance second effect to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like is executed in step S4206. do. As the avoidance second effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(a), characters such as "Safe!!" are displayed. We will inform you that we have succeeded in making it possible. After executing the process of step S4206, the preparation mode effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game in which normal replays A to C were won during the preparation mode, the first command to avoid start was not received in step S4212, and the replay prize other than the 13th replay was established. In this case, if the second command to avoid starting is not received in step S4214 and the 13th re-game is won in the operation mode of 2-frame bedding to 4-frame bedding, main control unit 101 side will be executed as described above. The freeze flag at the first start and the freeze flag at the second start are set in the preparation mode processing (step S4119, step S4120), and at the start of the game next to the game won in the normal reply A to C, the rotation An effect is executed (Fig. 88(b), Fig. 88(c)).

In other words, in the present embodiment, when winning as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, if a predetermined condition such as winning the 13th replay in a specific operation mode is successful, , it is possible to avoid starting the AT mode. By continuing to succeed in satisfying the predetermined condition and continuing the preparation mode to the maximum number of games, promotion from the 1st AT mode to the 2nd AT mode is performed, and benefits such as an additional lottery during that time are enjoyed. It becomes possible to On the other hand, when winning as a result for starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, if a predetermined condition cannot be established, a rotating performance in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning as a result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped. AT mode starts with .

In this case, whether or not the specific operation mode that satisfies a predetermined condition in the game won as a result of starting the AT mode is successful determines whether or not the game next to the game won as a result of starting the AT mode is successful. It is reported at the start, it is reported that the specific operation mode is successful by not executing the rotating performance, and it is reported that the specific operation mode is not successful by executing the rotating performance. Therefore, a player who wants to delay the start of the AT mode as much as possible operates the start lever 41 while expecting that the spinning effect will not be executed. On the other hand, even when the rotating effect is executed, the AT mode is not simply started, but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped. It is possible to give the impression that at least the start of the AT mode has been won as a result of the game.

By doing so, it is possible to add a game in which the start of the won AT mode is delayed by one's own operation while giving the impression of winning the start of the AT mode by one's own operation, and the rotation effect is used. It is possible to preferably improve the game playability of starting the AT mode.

In addition, as described above, both the start timing of the rotation effect at which the notification of the start of the AT mode is performed and the execution timing of the avoidance second effect at which the start of the AT mode has been avoided are both normal replies. Since it is the start of the next game after the A to C winning games, in the game feature of delaying the start of the AT mode as described above, the answer as to whether or not the delay could be made is performed at the start of the next game. Thus, it is possible to realize an interesting game property in which the player puts effort into the operation, such as performing the start operation of the next game while wishing that the delay could be made.

In addition, the success or failure of the second condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode cannot be determined from the stop result. The interest of people will be improved.

In the situation where the success or failure of the second condition cannot be determined, the game is terminated as it is. It is possible to do it at the free timing of the person.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first to third embodiments, after the AT mode winning notification effect is performed, in the preparation mode before the AT mode is started, when the result of AT mode start is winning The AT mode is configured to start, and when the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode is reached, the AT mode is started by generating a rotating effect corresponding to the result for starting the AT mode, but this embodiment. Now apply it to the CZ mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode and the predetermined result is won, the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is notified. , In the CZ mode, when the upper limit number of games in the CZ mode is reached without winning a predetermined result even if the AT mode transition lottery is won, a rotation performance corresponding to the predetermined result is generated to enter the AT mode transition lottery. We will inform you that you have been elected.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S4302 that the ceiling number of games has been reached, or if it is determined in step S4308 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S4309, and an AT mode winning flag is set. Execute the processing to be performed. At step S4310, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. The processing of steps S4314 to S4318 is the same as the processing of steps S817 to S820. Also, if it is determined in step S4308 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, in steps S4311 to S4314 similar to the processing of steps S813 to S816, a CZ mode transition lottery and the like are performed. Then, in steps S4314 to S4318, a precursor mode setting process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4310 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode, the processing for setting the portent mode is not performed, and the processing for terminating the CZ mode (step The AT lottery process ends without executing S810 and step S811).

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode does not end, and the CZ mode continues until the upper limit number of games set at the time of transition to the CZ mode is consumed. It is configured. However, by setting the information (AT mode winning flag) indicating that the AT mode transition lottery has been won as described above, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the remaining games in the CZ mode, and the AT addition process is performed. will be executed.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the precursor mode processing in this embodiment. As already described, the portent mode process is a process executed as one process in the winning result handling process by main controller 101 .

In step S4401, a precursor counter subtraction process is executed. Then, in step S4402, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the precursor mode processing is terminated. When the portent counter becomes 0, the portent flag is cleared in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the AT mode win flag is set in step S4404, and if it is set, step S4405. , the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, AT type determination processing is executed in step S4406, processing of inputting 40 to the AT preparation counter is executed in step S4407, and processing of setting an AT winning notification command is executed in step S4408. The processing of steps S4405 to S4408 is the same as the processing of steps S1205 to S1207 except that the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S4405.

After executing the process of step S4408, in step S4409, after executing the process of setting the freezing flag at the start of notification in the various flag storage area 106d, the precursor mode process ends. The informing freeze flag at the start is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the informing that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is to be executed in the rotating effect. A configuration for informing that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery with a rotating effect will be described later in detail.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S4404 and the current portent mode is triggered by winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the CZ mode is started in steps S4410 to S4413. After executing the process for the portent mode, the process for the precursor mode ends. The processing of steps S4410 to S4413 is the same as the processing of steps S1208 to S1211.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing AT win notification processing in this embodiment. The AT win notification process is a process for notifying that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode. Performed after processing.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the informing reply for the current game is won.

Here, in the present embodiment, the notice of winning the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode is configured to be executed when the normal reply A to C in the third embodiment is won, and in step S4501 The notification reply determined by the normal reply corresponds to the normal reply A to C. If the lottery result of the game this time is that the normal replies A to C have not been won, the AT winning notification processing is terminated as it is.

If the lottery result of the game this time is normal reps A to C, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag has been set, it is determined in step S4503 whether or not the AT mode winning flag has been set. If a negative determination is made in step S4502 or step S4503, the AT win notification process is terminated. If both the CZ mode flag and the AT mode winning flag are set, the process proceeds to step S4504.

In step S4504, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. In subsequent step S4505, AT type determination processing is executed. The AT type determination process is the same as the process of step S4406. In the AT type determination process (step S4505) when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode and the other AT type determination process (step S4406), the ratio of setting to the first AT mode or the second AT mode may be different, and it may be easier to set the second AT mode during the CZ mode. This point is the same for the first to third embodiments.

In the subsequent step S4506, a process of setting a winning notification game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The winning notification game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the game is a game for notifying that the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode and that the AT mode transition lottery is won. Then, in step S4507, after executing a process of setting the operation instruction command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT win notification process is terminated. The operation instruction command corresponds to the avoidance instruction command in the third embodiment, and the display control device 81 that receives the operation instruction command displays the avoidance instruction effect (FIG. 87(a)). , 3 characters imitating the "red 7" pattern are displayed side by side, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are used to notify that the operation is to be performed aiming at winning the 13th regame. to run.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the CZ mode processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the CZ mode process is a process executed as one process in the winning result handling process by the main controller 101 .

In step S4601, the CZ game counter is decremented, and in step S4602, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become zero. If it becomes 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S4603, and a process of setting a CZ end command is executed in step S4604.

In the following step S4605, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode win flag is not set in a situation where the CZ game counter has reached 0, or if the CZ game counter has not reached 0 at step S4602, the process proceeds to step S4606.

In step S4606, it is determined whether or not the winning notification game flag is set. In a game in which the winning notification game flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, and the winning of the AT mode transition lottery is to be notified in the normal reply A to C. If so, the process advances to step S4607 to execute processing for clearing the winning notification game flag. Then, in step S4608, it is determined whether or not the 13th replay winning prize has been established, and if established, the process of clearing the CZ game counter to 0 is executed in step S4609. At S4610, the process for turning on the AT winning output terminal provided on the external centralized terminal board 121 is executed, and then the CZ mode process is terminated. The output terminal for AT winning is for outputting the information that the AT mode transition lottery has been won to the data display of the game hall or the hall computer connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal board 121. terminal. The configuration of the AT winning output terminal is the same as that of the AT output terminal 121d. When the AT winning output terminal is turned ON, the signal output from the AT winning output terminal becomes a HI signal. Information that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery is output to the computer. It should be noted that the output terminal for winning AT is turned OFF after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5) have been played after being turned ON.

In step S4605, the AT mode winning flag is set at the end of the CZ mode, and although the AT mode transition lottery was won during the CZ mode, it should be notified that the AT mode transition lottery was won. If the normal reply A to C is not won, the process proceeds to step S4611. In step S4611, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, AT type determination processing is executed in step S4612. Note that the AT type determination process at the end of the CZ mode, the AT type determination process during the CZ mode (step S4505), and the other AT type determination process (step S4406), the first AT mode and the second AT mode The ratios to be set may be different, and the AT type determination process at the end of the CZ mode may facilitate setting to the second AT mode.

After executing the process of step S4612, after executing the process of setting the freezing flag at the start of notification in step S4613, the process for CZ mode ends. In addition, in step S4608, the 13th re-game winning has not been established, and although the winning of the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode should be notified, the corresponding result winning has been won. is not established, the freeze flag at the start of notification is set in step S4613, and then the CZ mode processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the normal mode (non-CZ mode) and the number of precursor games is consumed, and when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode And if you reach the upper limit of the number of games in CZ mode without winning the normal reply A to C, or if you win the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode and you win the normal reply A to C In spite of this, when the thirteenth replay winning prize cannot be established, the start freeze flag for notification is set. Hereinafter, the rotation effect processing when the freeze flag at the start of notification is set will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the rotation effect processing in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start, the second freeze flag at start, or the freeze flag at start for notification is set in step S4701. If none of the start-time freeze flags are set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. If any freeze flag is set at the start, in step S4702, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal reply A to C winning. If not, the process advances to step S4703. In step S4703, a process of setting a rotation effect command is executed, and in step S4704, a process of grasping the positional relationship of the corresponding symbols is executed.

Then, in step S4705, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the first start is set, and if it is set, in step S4706, the state in which the symbols for the second replay winning after 2 seconds are complete. , the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a low speed. If the first start freeze flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second start freeze flag is set in step S4707. The accelerations of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are set so that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R rotate at a low speed in a state where the symbols that will later win the third replay are aligned. These steps S4706 and S4708 are the same as the steps S2306 and S2307.

A negative determination in step S4707 means that the freeze flag at start of notification is set. In this case, in step S4709, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are accelerated so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a low speed in a state in which the symbols that will win the 13th replay after 2 seconds are aligned. set. More specifically, for example, the left reel 32L is used as a reference reel, and based on the grasped symbol position, the thirteenth replay symbol (“red 7” symbol) arranged on the reference reel before the start of rotation. , and the number of separated symbols from the middle reel 32M and the second replay symbols ("bell" symbol, "BAR" symbol) on the right reel 32R. For example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously started to rotate in the forward direction, and the left reel 32L, which is the reference reel, rotates three times after 2 seconds, the left reel 32L has 20 symbols. In 3 turns, 60 patterns are rotated in 2 seconds. In this case, the number of separated symbols between the second re-game symbol of the middle reel 32M and the thirteenth re-game symbol of the reference reel is a symbol, and the number of separated symbols of the second re-game symbol of the right reel 32R and the thirteenth re-game symbol of the reference reel is Assuming that the number is b symbols, the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is set to rotate by the number of symbols obtained by adding a symbol to 60 symbols after 2 seconds, and the acceleration of the right reel 32R is set to 60 symbols after 2 seconds. It is set to rotate by the number of symbols including the b symbol. After 2 seconds, after all the symbol combinations that result in the 13th replay winning prize are rotated, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are set to rotate at a constant low speed.

After executing the process of step S4706, step S4708 or step S4709, in steps S4710 to S4722, after executing various rotation effect processes, the rotation effect process ends. The processing of steps S4710 to S4722 is generally the same as the processing of steps S2308 to S2318, and only the processing for generating an effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped. different.

That is, when it is determined in step S4716 that the timing for temporarily stopping each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has come, it is determined in step S4717 whether or not the informing start freeze flag is set. If not, a process of setting the AT start command at startup as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed to perform an AT start performance at startup. On the other hand, when the freeze flag at the start of notification is set in step S4717, the AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4719. An AT winning notification performance is performed. After executing the process of step S4718 or step S4719, the process for maintaining the temporarily stopped state (steps S4720 to S4722) and the like are executed, and then the rotation effect process ends.

Also, if it is determined in step S4702 that the lottery result of this game is normal reply A to C winning, it is determined in step S4723 whether or not the AT preparation counter is greater than zero. In the next game when the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 and normal replays A to C are won during the preparation mode and the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize cannot be established. If there is, the process advances to step S4703 to perform processing for executing a rotation effect.

If the AT preparation counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter is greater than 0 in step S4724. The case where the CZ game counter is greater than 0 means that the AT mode transition lottery was won during the CZ mode, and although the normal replays A to C were won, the 13th replay winning prize could not be established. Proceeding to step S4703, a process for executing a rotation effect is performed.

On the other hand, if the next game that has reached the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode or CZ mode is a normal reply A to C winning, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is without performing the rotation effect in the game. do. In this case, if the game following the game that has reached the upper limit game of the preparation mode is a normal reply A to C winning, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is performed. We (Fig. 56), when the game next to the game that has reached the upper limit game of the CZ mode is a normal reply A to C winning, an operation instruction effect to establish the 13th replay winning prize is performed (Fig. 87(a)).

That is, in the process for AT winning notification (FIG. 91), if the CZ mode flag is not set in step S4502, the flow advances to step S4508 to determine whether or not the start freeze flag for notification is set. If the informing freeze flag is set in the game after the CZ mode flag has been cleared, it means that the game is the game following the game that has reached the maximum number of games in the CZ mode as described above. , Since the lottery result of the game is normal reply A to C (step S4501: YES), in this case, after clearing the freeze flag at the start of the notification at step S4509, the process proceeds to step S4507, and the 13th repeat After executing a process of setting an operation instruction command for establishing a game winning, the AT win notification process is terminated.

Also in the present embodiment, the reservation state is set so that the AT output terminal 121d is turned on during the rotation effect. In addition, when the spinning performance is performed when the freeze flag at the start of the notification is set, the reservation state is set so that the output terminal for AT winning is in the ON state during the spinning performance. . Specifically, in the above external output setting first process (FIG. 60), if any of the first freeze flag at start, the second freeze flag at start, and the freeze flag at start for notification is set ( Step S2601: YES), the reserved output flag is set (step S2602), and 2100 is input to the reserved output counter (step S2603).

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing timer update processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the timer update process is a process executed as one process in the timer interrupt process by the main controller 101 .

The processing of steps S4801 to S4804 is the same as the processing of steps S2701 to S2704. In step S4805, it is determined whether or not the reserved output flag is set. If the reserved output flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the reserved output counter is executed in step S4806. Then, in step S4807, it is determined whether or not the reservation output counter has reached 0. If it has become 0, processing for clearing the reservation output flag is executed in step S4808. In the following step S4809, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the start of the notification is set, and if it is not set and the reservation state is based on the first freeze flag at the start or the second freeze flag at the start , the AT output terminal 121d is turned on in step S4810. On the other hand, in step S4809, the freeze flag at the start of the notification is set, and in the case of the reservation state in the rotation effect for notifying that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the AT wins in step S4811. A process for turning on the output terminal for

If a negative determination is made in step S4805 or step S4807, or after the processing of step S4810 or step S4811 is executed, other various counter updating processing is executed in step S4812, and then the timer updating processing ends. .

As described above, the configuration for notification of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode such as the first embodiment may be applied to notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode. In terms of the game characteristics of the present slot machine 10 aiming to win the mode shift lottery and shift to the AT mode, after winning the AT mode shift lottery, the result notification for starting the AT mode is performed including a spinning effect. Compared to the configuration of the first embodiment, etc., the configuration of this embodiment, in which the result of winning the AT mode transition lottery is announced including the rotating effect, has a higher effect of making the result notification look forward to. I can say. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the user has won the notification target result (AT mode transition winning) by their own operation, and the effect of performing the rotation effect and the game during the rotation effect. It is possible to obtain the effect of outputting information to a device external to the machine more favorably.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a combination of some or all of them may be applied.

(1) As the result for starting the AT mode and the result for notifying the success of the AT mode transition, the configuration using the normal replies A to C has been described, but the configuration may be such that results different from the normal replies A to C are used. In addition, the winning probability of normal replies A to C is not limited to the above, and it may be easier to win (higher winning probability) or harder to win (lower winning probability). There may be. For example, when normal replies A to C are used as results for starting AT mode, the denominator of the winning probability of normal replies A to C may be a winning probability that is a number equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode. In this case, it is possible to realize game characteristics on the premise that the upper limit number of games (40) is easily reached in the preparation mode. For example, if the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode before the upper limit of the preparation mode is reached, a privilege is given to the player, so that winning as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode is prevented. It is possible to preferably enhance the effect of making the player look forward to the game, and the effect of giving the impression that the player has won the AT mode start by his/her own operation by displaying the winning result for starting the AT mode. Note that the privilege to be given when winning as a result of starting the AT mode before the upper limit is reached may be, for example, an increase in the initial number of games in the AT mode. In addition, we will change the configuration where promotion to 2nd AT mode is confirmed by reaching the upper limit of preparation mode, and make it a privilege that promotion to 2nd AT mode will be confirmed by winning the result for starting AT mode before reaching the upper limit. is also possible.

(2) The result for starting AT mode and the result for notification of winning AT mode transition have a different probability of winning as a result depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process (especially normal reply A) configuration However, regardless of the set value, the probability of winning the result for starting the AT mode and the result for notifying that the AT mode transition has been won may be the same probability. Further, even in the configuration in which the probability of winning differs depending on the set value, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to win. may be configured differently.

(3) The AT type determination process is executed when the number of precursor games becomes 0 and the mode is shifted to the preparation mode, but it may be executed when the AT mode shift lottery is won. In this case, the promotion lottery may be performed even in the game during the omen mode.

(4) Notification of the pressing order at the time of winning the result for starting the AT mode is performed by both the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side and the auxiliary display section 65 on the display control device 81 side. Either one of them may be used. For example, the main control device 101 may not execute the function, but the display control device 81 may execute the function.

(5) The instruction monitor 68 is configured to be able to notify each of the six operation sequences. A configuration may be adopted in which only the stop switches 42 to 44 to be operated first are notified of the pressing order for the pressing order to which only the 42 to 44 are associated.

(6) Although the advantageous section ends when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section may not end when the AT mode ends. For example, the advantageous interval may not end according to the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval at the end of the AT mode. If the number multiplied by the expected increase per game is less than or equal to the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section, or if it is less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section may not be terminated. If the number obtained by multiplying the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY with the above multiplied number is less than the upper limit increase number (2400) or less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section will not end. can be

(7) The lighting of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is controlled during transition to an advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which lighting control is performed when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied during the interval. The predetermined lighting condition may be established, for example, when a shift to the AT mode is confirmed, or when a situation arises in which notification of the pressing order may occur.

(8) A configuration may be adopted in which the press order notification is executed at least once during the CZ mode. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed at least once in the AT mode. , the AT mode or the CZ mode may not be terminated.

(9) At the start of the AT mode, the number of initial games in the AT mode may be determined according to the value of the AT preparation counter. For example, as the value of the AT preparation counter increases, the number of initial games in the AT mode (the value added to the AT game counter in steps S1611, S1618, etc.) tends to increase or increases. When the AT mode is started in a situation where the number of games played is small, it is possible to compensate for not being able to sufficiently complete the preparation mode (for example, not being able to receive many promotion lotteries).

(10) In the rotation effect process, the rotation is performed at a low speed and then temporarily stopped.

(11) In the rotating effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped, but the symbol combination different from the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning result for AT mode start is temporarily stopped. may be

(12) In the rotating effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, but the winning result for starting the AT mode is supported on a line different from the effective line ML. It is also possible to temporarily stop the symbol combination to be played.

(13) When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped in a rotating performance including a pseudo-game, the reels may be vibrated in small increments without being stopped, swayed, or held at a fixed position while being operated. good. In this sense, stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while they are operating may be defined as a temporary stop, and not being operated may be defined as a stop.

(14) Including a pseudo game, it may be configured to rotate at a low speed without stopping or temporarily stopping in the rotation effect, and at least the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode can be visually recognized by the player. Any configuration may be employed as long as it is controlled so as to cause such a situation.

(15) In the preparation mode, when the maximum number of games is reached, the second AT mode is set. The first AT mode may be set even when the upper limit number of games is reached.

(16) At the time of winning the result for starting the AT mode, if the winning result for starting the AT mode cannot be established, the AT mode is started by executing the rotation effect in the next game. The game in which the AT mode is started in the rotating effect is not limited to the next game, and may be the game after the next time. For example, a predetermined number ( For example, after the game in 3), the AT mode may be started with a rotating effect. In this case, in the game from the game in which winning was not established as a result for starting the AT mode to the predetermined number of games, if the result for starting the AT mode is won again, a spinning effect is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operation instruction notification is performed so as to establish a winning as a result of the AT mode start without performing the operation instruction notification. It is good also as composition which advances execution of rotation production so that it may not be performed.

(17) In one preparation mode, if winning as a result for starting the AT mode cannot be established when the result for starting the AT mode is won, that information is stored as information that can be handed over to the next and subsequent preparation modes. may be configured. In this case, for example, if there is information that could not establish a prize as a result for starting the AT mode, even if the first result for starting the AT mode in the preparation mode is won, the rotation effect is performed in the game. may be performed and the operation instruction notification may not be performed. In addition, when the number of times the AT mode start result winning has not been established reaches a predetermined number of times, even if the first AT mode start result wins, the rotating effect is performed as described above. It may be configured to give priority, or may be configured to decide to give priority to rotating performance when the result of AT mode start is won by lottery or the like according to the number of times the winning has not been established. It should be noted that, when winning the result for starting the AT mode, the information that the result of the AT mode start could not be established may be stored as information that is not subject to the initialization process of the advantageous section information.

(18) In the pseudo-game, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, all the unstopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, but when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. Alternatively, some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are not stopped may be stopped. In this case, which reel is to be stopped may be determined by lottery or the like, or if the operation instruction notification is performed along with the pressing order notification, the reels are stopped according to the operation order. may be configured.

(19) In the pseudo-game, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not been stopped are stopped simultaneously, but they may be stopped sequentially. In this case, the order of stopping may be determined by a lottery or the like, or in the case where the operation instruction notification is performed along with the pressing order notification, the reels may be stopped according to the operation order. .

(20) Not limited to the pseudo-game, the timing of performing the rotation effect is not limited to before the normal game, it may be after the normal game, or between the normal game and the normal game. good too.

(21) In the pseudo-game, the number of slides of 5 symbols or more is allowed, but it may be configured to perform stop control so that the number of slides is within 4 symbols as in the normal game. In this case, even if the stop operation is performed in the pseudo-game, the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning may not be stopped. If not stopped, after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped or before all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the second re-game winning, the third re-game winning, etc. are dealt with again. The symbol combination may be stopped. Re-fluctuation may be performed only on reels whose corresponding symbols have not stopped, or may be performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Alternatively, the rotation effect may be ended in a state in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the second re-game winning prize, the third re-game winning prize, etc. are not stopped without re-fluctuation. It is good also as composition which performs production. In the second rotation performance, the rotation performance is performed in a mode (mode of the first embodiment) in which the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning prize, the third re-game winning prize, etc. is automatically stopped without a stop operation. It is good also as a structure to carry out.

(22) If the lottery result of the target game for the rotation effect is a win for starting the AT mode, if the target game is triggered by the completion of the upper limit game of the preparation mode, the execution of the rotation effect is restricted, while the previous game If it is a target game triggered by the failure to establish a winning result for starting the AT mode, the execution of the spinning effect is allowed, but it may be configured to limit both. may also be allowed. In addition, if the target game is triggered by the completion of the upper limit game of the preparation mode, while executing the rotation effect (the aspect of the second embodiment) in the pseudo game, the result winning for the AT mode start is established in the previous game. If it is a target game triggered by the fact that it was not possible, it may be configured to execute a rotation effect (aspect of the first embodiment) without a pseudo game.

(23) In the external output setting first process in the reel control process, the game output terminal 121a is turned on. It may be at the end of the game (for example, at the time of execution of payout determination processing or winning result handling processing), or in the rotation start processing in the reel control processing, the game output terminal 121a is turned ON. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In the configuration in which the game output terminal 121a is turned on in the rotation start process, for example, it may be turned on when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate after the wait period has elapsed. In this case, if the rotation start process is the start timing of the normal operation, the timing of turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT during the rotation effect can be said to be such a configuration that it is turned on before the normal operation in one game. .

(24) The timing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is not limited to the above timing. For example, if the ON state is set during the rotating effect, the timing may be before the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning for AT mode start is temporarily stopped, and it corresponds to the result winning for AT mode start. It may be the timing of rotating at a low speed in a state in which the desired symbol combination is aligned, or may be the timing before the symbol combination is aligned. Also, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the symbol combination is stopped.

(25) The execution timing of the reservation processing (processing for setting a preparation counter, processing for setting a reservation output counter, etc.) for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is not limited to the above. For example, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON after the total number of precursor games and the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode (the total number of games is set to a predetermined counter). ), and after the total number of games of the number of ceiling games, the number of precursor games (upper limit number of precursor games), and the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode, the AT output terminal 121d may be configured to perform processing for turning on the . In addition, regarding the processing of setting the timing (reservation output counter) for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT, in the game before the target game in which the rotation effect is executed A configuration may be adopted in which the processing for setting the timing is executed at the time of the transition to the advantageous section).

(26) The configuration is such that the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON by the AT preparation counter or the like to manage the game when shifting to the preparation mode or the like. 121d may be set to an ON state to indicate a reserved state. In this case, in the preparation mode or the like, if the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode, the above flag may be cleared. is cleared, the flag may be set again if the winning result cannot be established when the result is won.

(27) On the premise that the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when a prize is established as a result of starting the AT mode, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON even during the spinning effect. In the rotating effect, information indicating that the shift to the AT mode will occur may be output from another output terminal, and in the rotating effect, other information may be output.

(28) The symbols stopped in the normal game and the symbols stopped in the pseudo-game are used to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode. The ratio between the number of symbols stopped and the number of symbols stopped in the pseudo-game is not limited to the above. It is also possible to use two symbols to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode. In addition, the symbol combination is made up of two symbols that are less than the total number of reels, and one symbol that is stopped in the normal game is used and one symbol that is stopped in the pseudo game is used. may be configured to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode.

(29) Assuming the game of 1, using the symbols stopped in the normal game and the symbols stopped in the pseudo game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped. However, the configuration may be such that the symbol combination is stopped across games. Specifically, the symbol combination may be stopped using the symbols stopped in the normal game of the previous game and the symbols stopped in the pseudo-game of the next game. In this case, in the rotation effect process, the reels for the symbols stopped in the normal game of the previous game are kept stopped, the reels for performing the pseudo game are rotated, and the reels are stopped to achieve the above symbol combination. should be stopped. Then, after the symbol combination is stopped, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be started by the rotation start processing.

(30) The aspect of the rotation production is an example. For example, the period until the low-speed rotation is reached with all the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode may be longer or shorter than the above period, or the symbol combination may be completed. The symbol combination may be stopped at the time of stopping by making the stop timing different without rotating in the state of holding. Also, the period during which the symbol combination remains stopped may be longer or shorter than the above. ), the process may be shifted to the rotation start process.

(31) In the preparation mode, it is possible to prevent the execution of push order notification, prevent the execution of the promotion lottery and the additional lottery, and make it advantageous to win the AT mode start result early in the preparation mode. good. In addition, even in the CZ mode, even after winning the AT mode shift lottery, the additional lottery is not executed until the AT mode shift lottery is won as a result of notifying the AT mode shift lottery, and after winning the AT mode shift lottery It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is advantageous to be elected as a result of notifying AT mode shift election early.

(32) In order to notify that the AT mode is to be started, etc., a configuration in which the symbol combinations such as the 2nd re-game winning prize, the 3rd re-game winning prize, the 13th re-game winning prize, etc. are stopped using normal replies A to C. However, the second re-game winning, the third re-game winning, the thirteenth re-game winning, etc. may not be established if the start of the AT mode is not notified. For example, an operation order different from the 2nd re-game winning, 3rd re-game winning, 13th re-game winning, etc. may be executed in the pressing order notification or the pressing order notification effect.

(33) Although the 1st BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which the second BB is won in the bet game, and none of the BBs is won in the 3-bet game.

(34) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. It is good also as a structure which can be elected. In this case, the first BB winning and the second BB winning are established in the 2-bet game, the first BB and the second BB are not won in the 3-betting game, and the first BB and the second BB are winning in the 3-betting game. A configuration in which neither 2BB winning is established may be adopted. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(35) The same lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, and the same game base is used.

(36) Both the first BB state and the second BB state are configured to play a 3-bet game. The number of bets may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as playing with the BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with the number of bets different from the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with the specified specified number of bets.

(37) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both configured to restrict the execution of instruction functions such as processing for notification of pressing order and specific processing. A configuration in which the presence or absence of restrictions differs depending on the type of BB state, for example, the execution of processes related to these instruction functions is restricted, while the execution of processes related to these instruction functions is permitted in games in the second BB state. good. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and processing related to each instruction function may be restricted or not restricted in any or all of them.

(38) The 3-bet game does not allow the 2nd BB to win, and the 2-bet game does not allow the 1st BB to win. A structure may be adopted, and a structure may be adopted in which it is more difficult to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(39) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(40) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, if the operation unit is operated once, the bet is 1, if it is operated twice, the bet is 2, and if it is operated 3 times, the bet is 3. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it will be 1 bet, and if you operate it 5 times, it will be 2 bets. A possible configuration is preferable.

(41) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the CZ mode is uniformly set to 10 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, although the upper limit of the number of games in the preparation mode is uniformly set to 40 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(42) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about +0.00, and the medals in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state neither increase nor decrease. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(43) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(44) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long period of time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(45) A slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(46) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) provided with a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(47) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the revolving bodies so as to perform a specific action that is a rendition action control using the revolving bodies;
Based on a predetermined decision opportunity, transition determination means (executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) that executes transition determination that enables transition to an advantageous state (AT mode) that is advantageous to the player function) and
The result of transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result (AT mode transition winning) that can be shifted to the advantageous state, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition correspondence result (normal reply A 1st advantageous transition means for shifting to the advantageous state in the case of ~C) (function for executing processing for starting AT mode based on second and third replay winnings by main controller 101);
The specific drive control means for performing the specific operation when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result and the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the transition correspondence result. (a function of executing a process for performing a first rotation effect and a second rotation effect in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for controlling the
a second advantageous transition means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode with a rotation effect by the main controller 101) for transitioning to the advantageous state when the specific action is performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal operation is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of, when the result of determination of transition to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is a transition result, the lottery result of the game is If it is a transition correspondence result, the state is shifted to an advantageous state, so that the result of the transition determination becomes the transition result and the game lottery result is a set of the transition correspondence result, thereby shifting to the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a transition to an advantageous state without the result of the transition determination being a transition result, and it is possible to prevent the transition to an advantageous state just by obtaining a transition result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player look forward to transitioning to an advantageous state while avoiding a decrease in interest in the result of the lottery for each game.

On the other hand, as described above, even if the transition result is obtained, if the transition to the advantageous state does not occur until the game lottery result becomes the transition response result, depending on the winning probability of the transition response result, etc., the transition result After that, there is a possibility that the transition to an advantageous state will be waited endlessly, which can be a factor of sluggishness in the game. On the other hand, if the state is automatically shifted to the advantageous state, the significance of making the transition to the advantageous state occur together with the result of the lottery will be lost.

Therefore, if the result of the game lottery is not the result of the transition corresponding to the result of the transition, the specific operation, which is the performance operation control using the revolving body, is executed to shift to the advantageous state. Thus, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state in a mode imitating a slot machine game in which a privilege is awarded depending on the number of stops of each rotating body, etc., and the result of the lottery of the game is affected. While avoiding a decrease in interest, it is possible to preferably solve the inconvenience of not being able to shift to an advantageous state as described above.

Note that the above configuration does not deny that the specific action is executed when the result of the lottery means is the transition correspondence result. In order to clarify the point, for example, the above "specifying means" may be defined as "the result of the transition determination by the transition determining means is the transition result, and regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means, the specific action Specific means for controlling the specific drive control means so that is performed (function for executing the process for performing the first rotation effect and the second rotation effect in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101)" good.

In addition, the ``specific action that is the production action control using the revolving body'' may be expressed as ``the specific action in which the start or progress of the normal action is limited'', and such a change in expression may be performed by other features or The same is true for other feature groups.

Feature A2. The specifying means, after the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, when the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the transition corresponding result in a predetermined specific number of games. , the game machine according to feature A1, wherein the drive control of the specific drive control means can be executed so that the specific action is performed.

According to the above configuration, priority is given to shifting to an advantageous state based on the result of the game being the transition correspondence result, and the specific action is performed when the transition correspondence result is not obtained even after playing a specific number of games. It becomes the structure which is made to move to an advantageous state by breaking. In this way, if priority is given to shifting to an advantageous state based on the transition correspondence result, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience when the transition correspondence result is not obtained without lowering the interest in the result of the game lottery. It becomes possible.

Feature A3. The lottery means executes the lottery so that the transition corresponding result is obtained with a probability of 1/predetermined number in each game,
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the specific number is set as a number larger than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, if the transition correspondence result is not obtained over the number of games larger than the denominator of the probability of the transition correspondence result, the specific action is performed and the state is shifted to the advantageous state. By doing so, basically, it is a game premised on shifting to an advantageous state by winning as a result of transition correspondence, and transitioning to an advantageous state through a specific action is only an auxiliary role. is clarified. Therefore, it is possible not to reduce the expectation that the lottery result of each game will be the result corresponding to the transition.

Feature A4. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the transition to the advantageous state is made when the pattern combination for the transition (the second and third replay result wins) stops. .

According to the above configuration, in the case of shifting to an advantageous state as a transition correspondence result, when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition correspondence result stops at an effective position in the game with the transition correspondence result, the A transition to an advantageous state will occur. In other words, even if the transition correspondence result is obtained, the transition to the advantageous state does not occur unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped. By doing so, in order to shift to an advantageous state, it is not enough for the game result to be the transition corresponding result, and the operation of the stop operation means is used to establish the winning of the transition corresponding result. In addition, the transition to an advantageous state requires the intervention of the player, and through the need for the intervention of the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature A5. The specifying means controls the specific driving control means so as to cause, as the specific action, a specific situation in which the pattern combination for transition exists at a specific position set to be visible through the display section. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the stop result that can be visually recognized through the display unit is the same in the case of transitioning to the advantageous state as a result of the transition response and the case of the transition to the advantageous state due to the specific action being performed. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of simulating the transition to both advantageous states.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the specifying means can control the specific drive control means so that the pattern combination for transition stops or temporarily stops at the specific position in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, not only does the pattern combination for transition exist at the specific position, but also the pattern combination for transition temporarily stops at the specific position. , the stop roll becomes the same, and the effect of making both transitions similar is enhanced.

The above-mentioned "stop" means a state in which the orbiting of the orbiting body is completed and the orbiting body does not operate. It includes a state of vibrating, swaying, and moving at a fixed position, and means a state different from a completely non-moving state. This point also applies to other features expressed using the "stop" or "temporary stop".

Feature A7. The specifying means controls the specific drive so as to cause a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position set to a position visible through the display unit for at least a predetermined period of time. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the means can be controlled.

According to the above configuration, a special situation occurs in which a specific combination of symbols is stopped at a specific position for a predetermined period of time, and the game shifts to an advantageous state. You can enhance the effect of resembling.

Incidentally, if the above configuration is applied to feature A5, the "specific pattern combination" should be limited to the "transition pattern combination".

Feature A8. After the normal operation is started, if a predetermined specific period has not elapsed before the next normal operation is started, means for waiting for the start of the next normal operation (by the main controller 101 function to set the weight in the rotation start process),
The specifying means executes the specified action before the normal action,
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the predetermined period is set so that the period from when the specific action is started until when the normal action is started is longer than or equal to the specific period. .

According to the above configuration, when the specific action is performed and the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the specific pattern combination is stopped, and the state is maintained for a predetermined period, so that after the specific action is started The period until the next normal action is started is longer than the period until the next game rotation starts in the case where a prize is won as a result of transition correspondence and a transition to an advantageous state occurs. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the specific action similar to the normal action, and the effect that is executed when a prize is awarded as a result of the transition correspondence can be performed even when the specific pattern combination is stopped in the specific action. It becomes possible to divert it easily.

Feature A9. The specifying means stops or temporarily stops the revolving body corresponding to the operation of the stop operation means in the specified action, thereby setting a specific position that is visible through the display unit. A first stop means (a first stop means capable of controlling the specific drive control means so that a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped occurs during the rotation performance by the main control device 101 is handled based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the looping body is stopped or temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means also in the specific action, as in the normal action. By doing this, the effect of mimicking the case of transitioning to an advantageous state by winning a transition response result is dramatically enhanced, and even if the transition response result is not won, the satisfaction of winning an advantageous state through one's own operation is enhanced. can be provided.

Incidentally, if the above configuration is applied to feature A5, the "specific pattern combination" should be limited to the "transition pattern combination".

Feature A10. The specifying means stops the revolving body even if the stop operation means is not operated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the specified action, thereby causing the rotating body to reach the specified position. A second stopping means capable of controlling the specific drive control means so as to cause a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped. A gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of controlling the stop of the corresponding reel regardless of whether or not the corresponding reel is stopped.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific pattern combination is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means even in the specific action, if the stop operation means is not operated, it is stopped with the passage of time. A game machine capable of preventing an event such as never-stopping from occurring, and respecting the will of a player without forcing a player who does not want to operate a stop operation means in a specific action to do so. can be

Note that the above configuration may be limited as follows.

"When a predetermined period of time elapses after the specific action is started, the specifying means stops all the circulating bodies that are not stopped even if the stop operation means is not operated, A second stop means (a stop switch 42 with the lapse of time during rotation performance by the main controller 101) capable of controlling the specific drive control means so as to cause a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position. A gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of controlling the stop of the corresponding reel regardless of the operation of 44).

By doing so, all the revolving bodies will stop with the lapse of time, and it is possible to smoothly realize the transition to the advantageous state by the specific action.

Feature A11. In the specific action, when a predetermined operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) different from the stop operation means is operated, the specifying means makes the corresponding rotation even if the stop operation means is not operated. By stopping the body, a third stopping means capable of controlling the specific drive control means (during rotation performance by the main controller 101) so as to create a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination stops or temporarily stops at the specific position A gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, characterized in that the gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10 is provided with a function of executing processing for controlling the stop of the reels based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific pattern combination is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means even in the specific action, when the predetermined operation means different from the stop operation means is operated, the stop operation means is activated. Since the revolving body is made to stop even if it is not operated, an event that it does not stop forever does not occur, and a player who does not want to operate the stop operation means in a specific action is forced to do so. Therefore, the game machine can respect the intention of the player.

Note that the above configuration may be limited as follows.

"The specifying means, when a predetermined operation means different from the stop operation means is operated in the specified action, stops all of the rotating bodies that are not stopped, thereby causing the specified pattern combination to be placed at the specified position." A third stop means (reel stop control based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 during the rotation effect by the main control device 101) that can control the specific drive control means so that the specific drive control means is stopped or temporarily stopped A gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for

By doing so, the number of times of operation can be reduced by operating a predetermined operation means rather than by operating each of the stop operation means corresponding to a plurality of winding bodies, and the number of times of operation can be reduced in a specific operation. Even a player who finds operation troublesome can easily stop a specific combination of patterns.

Feature A12. In spite of the fact that the specifying means has stopped or temporarily stopped the revolving body in the specific action, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position set at a position where the specific pattern combination can be visually recognized through the display unit. If not stopped, a specific process executing means (steps S3214 to S3228 by the main control device 101, steps S3301 to S3306 by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific processing corresponding to this stop or temporary stop A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

According to the above configuration, in the specific action of stopping or temporarily stopping the specific pattern combination, if the specific pattern combination is not stopped or temporarily stopped even though the orbiting body is stopped or temporarily stopped , the specific process corresponding to it as an error or the like is performed, so that it is possible to appropriately deal with the fact that the specific combination of symbols is not stopped or temporarily stopped.

Incidentally, if the above configuration is applied to feature A5, the "specific pattern combination" should be limited to the "transition pattern combination".

Feature A13. A specific game is a game to be executed by the specific action by the specific means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the transition correspondence result, the restriction means (normal reply A such as step S2302 in the rotation effect process by the main controller 101) that can limit the execution of the specific action ∼ A function of executing a process of restricting execution of a rotation effect when winning is C).

According to the above configuration, when a game that can be shifted to an advantageous state by the first advantageous transition means and a game that can be shifted to an advantageous state by the second advantageous transition means overlap, the first The configuration is such that priority is given to the transition by the advantageous transition means. In this way, on the assumption that the lottery result of the game becomes the transition target result and the game is expected to shift to an advantageous state, and by making the transition to the advantageous state via a specific action an auxiliary role, the game can be improved. It is possible to avoid losing interest in the lottery result and losing the real pleasure of the slot machine.

Feature A14. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
A specific game is a game to be executed by the specific action by the specific means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the transition correspondence result, the restriction means (normal reply A such as step S2302 in the rotation effect process by the main controller 101) that can limit the execution of the specific action ˜A function of executing a process of restricting the execution of the rotation effect in the case of winning C).

According to the above configuration, in the case of shifting to an advantageous state as a transition correspondence result, when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition correspondence result stops at an effective position in the game with the transition correspondence result, the A transition to an advantageous state will occur. In other words, even if the transition correspondence result is obtained, the transition to the advantageous state does not occur unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped. By doing so, in order to shift to an advantageous state, it is not enough for the game result to be the transition corresponding result, and the operation of the stop operation means is used to establish the winning of the transition corresponding result. In addition, the player's intervention is required for the transition to the advantageous state.

Moreover, when the game that can be shifted to the advantageous state by the first advantageous transition means and the game that can be shifted to the advantageous state by the second advantageous transition means overlap, the first advantageous transition means is used. Since the transition is given priority, it is assumed that the lottery result of the game becomes the transition correspondence result and the game is expected to transition to an advantageous state by establishing the winning of the transition correspondence result, and the advantageous state is obtained through a specific action. Even in a game that can cause a shift to a state, the player's operation will not deprive the player of the opportunity to shift to the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to favorably secure the enjoyment of shifting to an advantageous state by the player's operation.

Feature A15. In the specific game, when execution of the specific action is restricted by the restriction means and the pattern combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, third advantageous transition means capable of shifting to the advantageous state. (The function of limiting the execution of the spinning effect in the case of the normal reply A to C winning in step S2302 etc. in the rotating effect processing by the main control device 101, while keeping the AT mode winning flag cleared in the previous game). The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first advantageous transition means is prioritized over the second advantageous transition means in the specific game, the transition to the advantageous state occurs even if the pattern combination for transition cannot be stopped. It will be. By doing so, for example, in the case where transition response result wins occur continuously, even though the player is unable to achieve transition response result winning, the transition response result winning prize is kept forever. It is possible not to force the target to be aimed, and to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the advantageous state is not started endlessly.

Feature A16. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
In a situation where the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and when the pattern combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, Setting means for setting the next game of the game as a specific game to be executed the specific action by the specific means (AT mode start in the game won as a result of the AT mode start A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of executing a spinning effect in the next game when winning is not established as a result of (1).

According to the above configuration, even if the transition response result is won, if the transition response result win cannot be established, the transition to the advantageous state will occur with the specific action in the next game. Become. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as being unable to establish a win as a result of the transition and thus being unable to transition to an advantageous state indefinitely.

Feature A17. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
The specifying means is
After the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the next game in the case where the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the transition correspondence result in a predetermined specific number of games is selected. 1 specific game (game after preparation mode), and the first specific means (AT A function of executing a process to perform a rotation effect when the preparation counter becomes 0);
In a situation where the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and when the pattern combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, The game next to the game is a second specific game (game after winning the result for starting AT mode) in which the specific action is to be executed by the specifying means, and the specific action is performed in the second specific game. A second specifying means capable of executing the drive control of the specified drive control means as shown in FIG. function) and
with
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the first specific game is the transition correspondence result, while restricting the execution of the specific action, the lottery result by the lottery means in the second specific game is the transition correspondence result. In this case, the means for permitting the execution of the specific action (restricts the execution of the rotation effect when the final game in the preparation mode in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101 is a normal reply A to C winning, while in the preparation mode the normal In the case that the reply A~C is won and the 2nd replay or the 3rd replay winning is not established in the relevant game, if the next game is the normal reply A~C win, the rotation effect is performed. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized in that it has a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, after the state becomes possible to shift to the advantageous state as a result of the transition, and before the specific number of games are completed, if the winning as a result of the transition is established, the state is shifted to the advantageous state, It is premised that if a transition response result is not won by the time a specific number of games are completed, a transition to an advantageous state occurs with a specific action, and even if the transition response result is won, the transition response result wins If it is not established, the next game is configured to transition to an advantageous state with a specific action, and as a result of these transition correspondences, the game following the game in which the prize was not established and the specific number of games are completed. If the result of the lottery for the game that is subject to the execution of a specific action is a transition compatible result, such as a game after a certain number of games have been played, the execution of the specific action is restricted and transition compatible. While an opportunity to establish a win as a result is given, the execution of the specific action is not restricted in the game following the game in which the win was not established as a result of the transition. This is because in the game next to the game in which the transition-response winning result could not be established, the opportunity to establish the transition-response result winning was already given, but the specific number of games was completed. This is due to the fact that in later games, the opportunity to win a prize as a result of transition is not given. In other words, by doing so, it is possible to prevent excessive granting of the opportunity by the specific action while granting the opportunity to establish the winning as a result of transition.

Feature A18. Any one of the features A1 to A17, characterized in that the greater the number of games played from the result of the transition determination to the start of the advantageous state, the easier it is for the player to be advantageous. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, after the transition results and the situation becomes possible to cause the transition to the advantageous state, the transition response result is obtained and the transition to the advantageous state is made to look forward to, but the transition to the advantageous state is made. Since the greater the number of games played before the game is played, the more advantageous it becomes, and thus the player desires that the result does not correspond to the transition. On top of that, since it is possible to transition to an advantageous state with a specific action, it is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of games until winning as a result of transition correspondence, It is possible to prevent the game from becoming excessively advantageous.

Feature A19. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
In a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition response result, and when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. stops the pattern combination for transition at the effective position so that the transition to the advantageous state occurs, while the stop operation means is in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. Means for preventing the transition to the advantageous state by not stopping the pattern combination for transition at the effective position when operated (function for executing the processing of step S4113 by main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to delay the transition to the advantageous state by operating in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode even if the transition response result is obtained after the transition result is obtained. By doing so, it is possible to start the advantageous state at the timing of the player's preference, and as in the feature A18, the greater the number of games played before the transition to the advantageous state, the more advantageous the player is. By applying it to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as being advantageous by delaying the transition to an advantageous state.

Feature A20. In a situation where the transition determination result by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the stop operation means is a predetermined operation mode among the second operation modes. When operated by (operation resulting in two frames or more slipping), the specific action is performed by the specific means in the game next to the game in which the transition corresponding result is obtained, thereby shifting to the advantageous state. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific operation mode (an operation that results in one slide or less) among the second operation modes, the game following the game that resulted in the transition correspondence result Characteristic A19 characterized by comprising a means (a function of executing the processing of step S4112 by the main controller 101) for preventing the movement to the advantageous state by preventing the specific action from being performed by the specifying means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, even if the transition to the advantageous state is avoided by not stopping the pattern combination for transition in the second operation mode, in the predetermined operation mode of the second operation mode, In the next game, a specific action occurs and a transition to an advantageous state occurs, and in a specific operation mode, a specific action occurs and a transition to an advantageous state does not occur. By doing so, the player who wants to delay the transition to the advantageous state can complete the next game after performing the second operation mode, hoping that the specific action will not be performed. , it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Feature A21. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the stop operation means is operated in the predetermined operation mode, the predetermined pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means is operated in the above manner. The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the predetermined pattern combination stops at the effective position when operated in a specific operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the stop result for stopping at the effective position is common between the operation in the predetermined operation mode and the operation in the specific operation mode among the second operation modes. Then, depending on whether or not the specific action is performed in the next game, it becomes possible to check the answer as to which operation mode the operation was performed in, and whether or not the specific action is performed in the next game. It is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to

Feature A22. Any one of the features A1 to A21, wherein the specifying means is capable of controlling the specific drive control means so that the specific action is performed before the normal action is performed in one game. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the specific action is executed at the start of one game, and the starting operation means can be operated while expecting the specific action to be performed or not to be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize an amusing game property in which the operation of the starting operation means requires effort.

Feature A23. Any one of features A1 to A22, wherein the specifying means is capable of controlling the specific drive control means so that the specific action is performed after the normal action is performed in one game. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the specific action is executed at the end of one game, and the user can operate the stop operation means while expecting the specific action to be performed or not to be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize an interesting game property in which force is applied to the operation of the stop operation means.

Feature A24. Any of the features A1 to A23, wherein the specifying means is capable of controlling the specific drive control means so that the specific action is performed between the normal actions in one game. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the specific action is executed in the middle of one game, the timing at which the specific action is performed is arbitrary, the boundary between the specific action and the normal action is difficult to understand, and one game is played. It is possible to greatly improve the playability of the game.

Feature A25. In the game in which the specific action is performed, after the first revolving body stops as the normal action, the specifying means uses the stop result of the first revolving body to determine what the first revolving body is. The gaming machine according to feature A24, characterized in that it is possible to perform the specific action by a second rotating body that is different and has not yet stopped.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific action is performed in the middle of the game, the stop result actually stopped in the normal action is used for the specific action, so that the specific action gives an impression of the action in the production. It is possible to make it difficult to give, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction given by making a transition to an advantageous state in a specific action.

The inventions described in the features A1 to A25 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A25, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B22, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, a first specific information output means (AT by the main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information to a device outside the gaming machine A function for executing processing to turn ON the output terminal 121d for AT based on the winning result for mode start),
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
When the lottery result by the lottery means does not result in the specific result, a specific pattern combination is present at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect operation control using the revolving body. a specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that controls each of the winding bodies so that a specific action that causes a specific situation to occur is performed;
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different from the first specific information to a device outside the game machine in correspondence with the specific situation function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is a specific result, the first specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Even when a specific action is performed to create a specific situation in which the combination of symbols is present at a specific position, the first specific information and the second specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, when a specific action is performed to resemble a normal action, it is possible not only to imitate the action of the revolving body, but also to obtain the similar effect from the aspect of information output to a device outside the game machine. . In this case, for example, in a configuration where the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

By setting the "specific position" to the "effective position", it is possible to increase the behavior of making the specific action similar to the normal action. This point is the same for other features in which the expressions of "specific position" and "valid position" coexist.

Feature B2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, the privilege providing means can provide a privilege corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specified result wins when the specified combination of symbols stops at the specified position, a specific situation occurs in which the specified combination of symbols is present at the specified position. Since the specific action is performed in this manner, it is possible to give the impression that the specific action is a normal action based on the result of the specific action. The first specific information is output when the specific result is won, and the first specific information and the second specific information are also output when the specific action is performed. As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether a specific combination of patterns is stopped as a prize or whether a specific combination of patterns is present at a specific position as a specific action. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably improve the playability using the specific action.

Feature B3. The first specific information output means outputs the first specific information when the specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result,
The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information when the specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position occurs. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the first specific information is output when the specific combination of symbols stops at the valid position and the specific result wins, the specific combination of symbols is displayed at the specific position even in the specific action. When a specific situation existing in the state occurs, output of the first specific information or the like is performed. By doing so, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the normal action in which the first specific information is output in accordance with the progress of the game, and the specific action, which is the performance action control using the revolving body, and the specific action is used. It is possible to more preferably improve the effect of the feature B1.

Feature B4. The first specific information output means outputs the first specific information in the game next to the game when the specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result. to output
The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information when the specific pattern combination does not exist at the specific position after the specific situation occurs. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the first specific information is output in the game next to the game when the specific combination of symbols stops at the valid position and the specific result winning is established. After the occurrence of the specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position, the first specific information or the like is output when the specific pattern combination does not exist at the specific position. By doing so, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the normal action in which the first specific information is output in accordance with the progress of the game, and the specific action, which is the performance action control using the revolving body, and the specific action is used. It is possible to more preferably improve the effect of the feature B1.

Feature B5. The specific drive control means is capable of causing the specific situation by stopping or temporarily stopping the specific pattern combination at the specific position in the specific action, and after causing the specific situation , each said orbiting body is controllable to orbit,
The first specific information output means, when the specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, outputs each of the revolving bodies in the next game of the game. Outputting the first specific information when a lap is started,
The second specific information output means is characterized by outputting the first specific information or the second specific information when the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started after the specific situation occurs. The gaming machine according to feature B4.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the characteristic B4, and after the specific pattern combination is stopped in the normal operation and the specific operation, the first specific information or the like is output at the timing when the orbiting body starts to rotate. is performed, it is possible to further improve the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the two motions.

Feature B6. a first specific information output means capable of executing setting processing for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means before the specific operation is performed by the specific drive control means; The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, further comprising setting means (a function of executing the first external output setting process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, there is no need to perform the setting process for outputting the first specific information or the like while the specific drive control means is performing the specific operation. An increase in processing load can be suitably avoided.

Feature B7. The first setting means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means before the revolving body is started in the specific operation by the specific drive control means. The gaming machine according to feature B6, which is capable of executing a setting process to output .

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific action is an action including the revolving of the revolving body, the first specific information, etc., is generated before the revolving body is started in the specific action. Setting processing for output is executed. By doing so, the processing for drive control of the circulator and the processing for outputting the specific information do not overlap, and the processing can be decentralized.

Feature B8. Setting processing for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means in a specific game before the target game in which the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, further comprising second setting means (a function of executing processing for setting the reservation state by the main control device 101) capable of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, there is no need to perform the setting process for outputting the first specific information or the like while the specific drive control means is performing the specific operation. An increase in processing load can be suitably avoided.

In particular, in this configuration, since the configuration is such that the output of the first specific information or the like is performed in the game prior to the game in which the specific action is performed, no duplication with the process for the specific action will occur. , and the effect of avoiding the increase in the processing load can be enhanced.

Feature B9. Setting an output state for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means in a specific game prior to the target game in which the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means A second setting means capable of executing processing (a function of executing processing for setting a reserved state by main controller 101);
In the target game in the situation set to the output state, before the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means, the first specific information or the second a first setting means (function for executing the first external output setting process by the main controller 101) capable of executing the process of setting the timing for outputting the specific information;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the output state is set in the specific game before the target game, and the timing for outputting the first specific information or the like is set before the specific action is performed in the target game in the output state. be done. In this way, after setting the output of the first specific information and the like to be shared by a plurality of processes, all of the processes are completed at a timing before the output of the first specific information and the like. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the processing load.

Feature B10. Said first setting means, in said target game in a situation in which said output state is set, prior to the start of rotation of said revolving body in said specific action by said specific drive control means, said second The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the specific information output means is capable of executing a timing setting process for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific action is an action including the revolving of the revolving body, the first specific information and the like are transmitted before the revolving body starts in the specific action. Output timing setting processing is executed. By doing so, the processing for drive control of the circulator and the processing for outputting the specific information do not overlap, and the processing can be decentralized.

Feature B11. The first setting means is capable of executing processing for setting a specific period (reservation output counter) until the second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information. can be,
The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information when the specific period elapses after the specific period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B9 or feature B10, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the first setting means sets the specific period until the output as the process of setting the timing of outputting the first specific information and the like, and when the specific period elapses, the first specific information and the like are output. It becomes the configuration to be output. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration for presetting the output of the first specific information and the like with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature B12. It can be set to output the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means in a specific game before the target game in which the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means. A second specific setting means (a function for executing processing to set the reserved state by the main control device 101),
The specific drive control means is a game after the specific game and is a configuration that may execute the specific action in a previous game before the target game,
Features B1 to B11, wherein the second specific information output means is configured to output the first specific information or the second specific information even when the specific action is performed in the previous game. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

As in the above configuration, it is a game after the specific game that sets the output of the first specific information, etc., and is specified in the previous game before the target game that was originally supposed to perform the specific action. Even in a configuration in which an action may be performed, the first specific information or the like is output in correspondence with the specific action. In a configuration in which there is a possibility that the situation in which the first specific information or the like should be output is earlier than planned, it is necessary to complete the setting for the output of the first specific information or the like in the game in advance. is high, and by applying the configuration of feature B1 to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the excellent effect of feature B1 more preferably.

Feature B13. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
A setting means (a function of executing an external output setting first process by the main control device 101) capable of setting the timing for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means,
Any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the setting means sets the first specific information or the second specific information to be output at a timing after a predetermined period of time from the timing at which the specific situation occurs. The gaming machine described in .

The specific action is a game action different from the normal action, and may require special control such as making the drive control of the revolving body different from the normal drive control. Therefore, if the specific information is set to be output at the exact timing when the specific situation occurs, there is a possibility that the timing of the occurrence of the specific situation and the output timing of the first specific information, etc. may not match. 1 If the output of the specific information, etc. occurs before the specific situation occurs, the output of the first specific information, etc. (by updating the data display) ), it may be known in advance that the particular situation will occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, by setting the first specific information to be output at a timing later than the timing when the specific situation occurs, the first specific information and the like are output before the specific situation occurs. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being output.

Feature B14. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, wherein the specific situation occurs when the specific combination of symbols stops or temporarily stops at the specific position.

According to the above configuration, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position by the specific action, and in this case, the first specific information or the like is output. By doing so, in the game in which the specific result is won, the specific pattern combination is stopped and the specific result winning is established. is output, and through the output of the first specific information and the like, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the specific action is a necessary action for the progress of the game.

Feature B15. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
The specific drive control means is configured to execute the specific action before the normal action,
The second specific information output means is configured to output the first specific information or the second specific information when the normal operation is started after the specific situation occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14.

According to the above configuration, after the occurrence of the specific situation, the output of the first specific information and the like is performed when shifting to the normal operation. By doing so, the player can confirm that the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position, confirm that the first specific information or the like is output (that the data display is updated), can be performed at different timings, and an event occurs in which the existence of a specific pattern combination at a specific position is overlooked due to excessive attempts to confirm that the first specific information etc. is output. become difficult.

Feature B16. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
Determination means (corresponding to the second replay or the third replay in the rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that determines that the particular pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at the particular position in the specific action Equipped with a function that executes processing to determine that the stop roll is temporarily stopped,
Any one of characteristics B1 to B15, wherein the second specific information output means is capable of outputting the first specific information or the second specific information based on the determination result of the determination means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the specific picture combination is actually stopped or temporarily stopped, the first specific information or the like is output, so the specific picture combination is not stopped or temporarily stopped. It is possible to avoid a contradiction such that the first specific information or the like is output in spite of the above.

Feature B17. The specific drive control means is characterized in that, as the specific action, when the stop operation means is operated, a pseudo game capable of stopping the corresponding revolving body can be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B16.

According to the above configuration, the external output of the first specific information and the like is performed in the pseudo game in which the revolving body can be stopped by operating the stop operation means. By doing so, it is possible to favorably enhance the effect of simulating a normal game since the operation of the stop operation means is involved, compared to a configuration in which the rotation of the revolving body is simply controlled as an effect. .

In addition, the "pseudo-game" may be limited as follows, and the same applies to other features limited by the expression of the "pseudo-game".

"When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means is controlled so that the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result can be granted. The game is usually a game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the valid position, the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is not given by the privilege giving means. or a pseudo-game whose provision is restricted.”

Or, "when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the privilege giving means A game that is controlled so that a privilege corresponding to the result can be given is a normal game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result, and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the predetermined result by the privilege granting means is obtained. Pseudo-games in which the granting of corresponding benefits is not performed or the granting of such benefits is restricted.

Feature B18. The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information during the specific action so as to output the first specific information or the second specific information after execution of the specific action. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B17, characterized in that setting is performed.

According to the above configuration, the output setting of the first specific information or the like is performed during the specific action, and the first specific information or the like is output after the specific action is executed according to the output setting. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the game is progressing based on the specific action. can be increased.

Feature B19. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Each of the circulating bodies performs a specific action that causes a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect operation control using the circulating bodies. A specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls the
Specific information output means (function for executing timer management processing by the main control device 101) for setting output of specific information to a device outside the gaming machine in response to the specific situation;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine whose normal action is to give a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action, which is an effect action control using a revolving body, is performed and a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position. Since a specific situation may occur, the effect using the action of the revolving body can be used to improve the playability.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned specific actions tend to give the impression that they are performance actions different from normal actions, and there is a possibility that the specific actions may make the player who desires a quick progress of the game feel troublesome. . In addition, the manager of the game hall has to distinguish whether a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position is generated as a lottery result by a lottery means in a normal operation or in a specific operation. It becomes difficult to stick to the game, and there may be a problem that it becomes difficult to identify a fraudulent act to illegally obtain a profit without going through the lottery of the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to output specific information to the outside of the game machine in response to a specific situation in which a specific combination of symbols is present at a specific position in a specific action. It is possible for the connected data display to update the display of the data based on the specific information. It is possible to give the player an impression that is an action necessary for the progress of the game. Furthermore, the hall computer of the game hall connected to the game machine can grasp that a specific situation has occurred in a specific action, making it easier to identify the fraudulent act. As a result of the above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game using the specific action without causing the above inconvenience.

Note that each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied to the feature B19, and a part of each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied. Alternatively, all or part of the configurations defined in any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied in combination.

Feature B20. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, first specific information output means ( A function for executing processing to turn ON the AT output terminal 121d based on the winning result for starting the AT mode by the main control device 101),
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
When the lottery result by the lottery means does not result in the specific result, a specific pattern combination is present at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect operation control using the revolving body. a specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that controls each of the winding bodies so that a specific action that causes a specific situation to occur is performed;
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different from the first specific information to a device outside the game machine in correspondence with the specific situation function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is a specific result, the first specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Even when a specific action is performed to create a specific situation in which the combination of symbols is present at a specific position, the first specific information and the second specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, when a specific action is performed to resemble a normal action, it is possible not only to imitate the action of the revolving body, but also to obtain the similar effect from the aspect of information output to a device outside the game machine. . In this case, for example, in a configuration where the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

Note that each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied to the feature B20, and a part of each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied. Alternatively, all or part of the configurations defined in any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied in combination.

Feature B21. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, a first specific information output means (AT by the main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information to a device outside the gaming machine A function for executing processing to turn ON the output terminal 121d for AT based on the winning result for mode start),
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Specific drive control means (main controller 101) for controlling each revolving body so as to perform a specific operation, which is a performance operation control using the revolving body, when the lottery result by the lottery means does not result in the specific result. function to execute rotation effect processing by) and
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different from the first specific information to a device outside the gaming machine in correspondence with the specific action function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is a specific result, the first specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Since the first specific information and the second specific information may be output to a device outside the game machine even when the action is performed, for example, when the specific action is performed to resemble a normal action In addition to simulating the action of the revolving body, it is possible to obtain the effect of simulating from the aspect of information output to a device outside the game machine. In this case, for example, in a configuration where the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

Note that each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied to the feature B21, and a part of each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied. Alternatively, all or part of the configurations defined in any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied in combination.

Feature B22. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, a first specific information output means (AT by the main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information to a device outside the gaming machine A function for executing processing to turn ON the output terminal 121d for AT based on the winning result for mode start),
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the revolving bodies so as to perform a specific action that is a rendition action control using the revolving bodies;
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different from the first specific information to a device outside the gaming machine in correspondence with the specific action function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is the specific result winning, it is assumed that the first specific information may be output to a device external to the game machine. Since there are cases where the first specific information and the second specific information are output to the device, for example, when performing a specific action similar to a normal action, it is not enough just to imitate the action of the looping body. In addition, it is possible to obtain the similar effect from the aspect of information output to a device outside the game machine. In this case, for example, in a configuration where the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

Note that each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied to the feature B22, and a part of each configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied. Alternatively, all or part of the configurations defined in any one of the features B1 to B18 may be applied in combination.

In addition, the invention described in the above features B1 to B22 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B22, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B22, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, and the features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
Stopping a specific pattern combination (a second re-game winning prize or a third re-game winning prize) at an effective position set at a position where the lottery result by the lottery means can be visually recognized through the display unit. is a possible specific result (for example, normal replies A to C), a specific privilege means capable of giving a specific privilege (AT mode) (AT mode by the main controller 101) Executes processing to start function) and
By the drive control means, when the start operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is stopped, and by the privilege provision means The normal operation is to be controlled so that the privilege can be granted,
Each of the revolving bodies is performed so as to perform a specific action that causes a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect control using the revolving body. Specific drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing rotation effect processing by main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the specific game that is the execution target of the specific action, the specific drive control means can limit the specific action to be performed (main controller 101 A function that executes a process not to perform a rotation effect when it is a normal reply A to C winning in the rotation effect process by),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result, a specific pattern combination is stopped and a corresponding specific privilege is provided. Furthermore, since the specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position can also occur in a specific action as performance action control using a revolving body, even if the result of the game does not result in winning the specific result. , it is possible to freely display a specific pattern combination, and it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in the timing of granting a specific privilege. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the specific privilege cannot be granted.

On top of that, if the game in which the specific pattern combination can be stopped based on the specific result winning overlaps with the game in which the specific action is to be executed, the specific action will be performed in the normal action instead of the specific action. Since the specific means for restricting the execution of the specific action is provided so as to give priority to stopping the pattern combination, the real pleasure of the slot machine is that the player stops the revolving body by his/her own operation and obtains a privilege. It is possible to expect an excellent effect that it is possible to grant a specific privilege at a free timing by the above-mentioned specific action while not erasing the above.

Feature C2. In the game before the specific game, prior setting means for setting the execution of the specific action in the specific game (execution of processing to set various start freeze flags and AT preparation counters by main control device 101 The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it has a function to play.

According to the above configuration, after the setting of performing the specific action in the specific game by the previous setting means, if the lottery result of the specific game is not the specific result, the specific action is executed and the lottery result of the specific game is performed. is a specific result, execution of the specific action is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that a specific combination of symbols stops many times in the game while the game for executing the specific action is set in advance and the processing is decentralized. It becomes possible.

Feature C3. Advantage determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination for shifting to a predetermined advantageous state;
Pre-transition state setting means for setting a pre-transition state (preparation mode, CZ mode) enabling transition to the advantageous state when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result that allows the transition to the advantageous state. (a function of executing processing to set the preparation mode or CZ mode by the main controller 101);
with
The specific privilege means shifts to the advantageous state as the specific privilege when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in the pre-transition state and the specific pattern combination stops at the valid position. is the configuration,
A second specific privilege means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode when performing a rotation effect by the main control device 101) that shifts to the advantageous state when the specific situation by the specific drive control means occurs. prepared,
When the pre-transition state is set by the pre-transition state setting means, the pre-setting means performs the specific action in the specific game which is a game after the game in which the setting is performed. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized by setting

By adopting the above configuration, a pre-transition state in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous state occurs, and when a specific result is obtained in the pre-transition state, a specific combination of symbols can be stopped and a transition to an advantageous state occurs. Also, even if the specific action is performed in the specific game in the pre-transition state, the transition to the advantageous state will occur. In this way, on the premise that the transition to an advantageous state occurs in either the event that becomes the specific game or the event that becomes the specific result, and if both events overlap, the specific result side is prioritized. If so, it is possible not only to avoid an event in which a specific combination of symbols is displayed many times due to both events, but also to avoid the inconvenience of redundantly performing processing for transitioning to an advantageous state. .

Feature C4. The specifying means is capable of permitting the execution of the specified action in the specified game when a predetermined specified condition is established even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result in the specific game is the specific result, the execution of the specific action is not uniformly limited, and when the specific condition is satisfied, even if the specific result is won Execution of specific actions is permitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in executing the specific action.

Feature C5. The specific condition when the specific pattern combination cannot be stopped at the valid position in a predetermined game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, which is a game before the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that:

In the game before the specific game, the player who could not stop the specific pattern combination even though it was a specific result can It is thought that the player would feel better if the specific pattern combination was stopped. Therefore, as described above, under the condition that the specific combination of symbols could not be stopped at the time of winning the specific result, the execution of the specific action is permitted even if the specific result is obtained in the specific game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a flexible game according to the skill level of the player without forcing the player to perform further operations.

Feature C6. In the game before the specific game, prior setting means for performing the setting of executing the specific action in the specific game (function for executing processing to set various freeze flags at the start by the main control device 101) with
The feature C5 is characterized in that the prior setting means performs setting to execute the specific action in the specific game when the specific combination of symbols does not stop at the effective position in the predetermined game. The gaming machine described in .

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature C5, and by using the above configuration, it is determined that the player is unable to stop a specific combination of symbols, and then a specific action is executed. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to accurately follow a player who is inexperienced in the operation by a specific operation while making full use of the real thrill of a slot machine that gives a privilege by stopping the revolving body by the operation of the player.

Feature C7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, a special notification means for executing a special notification that the specific pattern combination can be stopped by a predetermined notification means (At start processing by the display control device 81 functions to execute),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the special notification is performed by the special notification means when execution of the specific action is restricted by the specification means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific action and the specific result overlap in the specific game and the execution of the specific action is restricted, the special notification that makes it possible to stop the specific pattern combination based on the winning of the specific result. is executed. In this way, even though the priority is given to stopping the specific picture combination on the normal operation side, the player does not notice it and the specific picture combination does not stop. can be prevented from occurring.

Note that the above-mentioned "special notification means" may be limited as follows, and by doing so, the significance of executing the special notification is enhanced.

"When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position,
special notification means for executing a special notification corresponding to the first operation mode by a predetermined notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result.

Moreover, the above configuration does not deny that the special notification means executes the special notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result and the execution of the specific operation is not restricted by the specific means.

Feature C8. The specifying means is capable of permitting execution of the specified action in the specified game when a predetermined specified condition is satisfied even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result,
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein when the specific condition is satisfied, execution of the special notification by the special notification means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special notification is executed and a specific pattern combination is displayed repeatedly even though the specific action is being executed.

Feature C9. It is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode when executing the rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that can give the specific privilege based on the occurrence of the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7.

According to the above configuration, since the specific privilege is given by performing the specific action, when the specific result is obtained in the specific game in which the specific action is performed, the specific privilege is duplicated. A possibility arises. In this regard, as in the feature C1, the execution of the specific action is restricted in such a case, so the significance of the restriction is increased.

The above configuration corresponds to the "second specific privilege means" in feature C3.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the specific combination of symbols stops or temporarily stops at the specific position in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, not only does the specific combination of symbols exist at the specific position, but the specific combination of symbols is stopped or temporarily stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the impression that the specific combination of symbols is stopped and the provision of the specific privilege are a set, and the performance effect of the specific action is enhanced.

Feature C11. The specific drive control means is capable of executing a pseudo-game capable of stopping the corresponding revolving body when the stop operation means is operated as the specific action. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10.

According to the above configuration, in a specific game, a situation can occur in which a specific pattern combination exists in an effective position during a pseudo game in which the revolving body can be stopped by operating the stop operation means. If the pseudo-game and the game of stopping the specific pattern combination based on the actual winning of the specific result overlap, the execution of the pseudo-game is restricted. By doing so, restricting the execution of the specific action also avoids forcing the player to perform duplicate operations, making it possible to increase the significance of the restriction. .

Feature C12. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
Stopping a specific pattern combination (a second re-game winning prize or a third re-game winning prize) at an effective position set at a position where the lottery result by the lottery means can be visually recognized through the display unit. is a possible specific result (for example, normal replies A to C), a specific privilege means capable of giving a specific privilege (AT mode) (AT mode by the main controller 101) Executes processing to start function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, a special notification means for executing a special notification that the specific pattern combination can be stopped by a predetermined notification means (At start processing by the display control device 81 functions to perform) and
By the drive control means, when the start operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is stopped, and by the privilege provision means The normal operation is to be controlled so that the privilege can be granted,
Each of the revolving bodies is performed so as to perform a specific action that causes a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination is present at a specific position set to a position that can be visually recognized through the display unit as effect control using the revolving body. Specific drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing rotation effect processing by main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the specific game targeted for execution of the specific action, execution of the specific action by the specific drive control means and execution of the special notification by the special notification means A specifying means capable of limiting any of them (a function of executing a process not to perform a rotation effect when normal reps A to C are won in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result, a specific pattern combination is stopped and a corresponding specific privilege is provided. Furthermore, since the specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position can also occur in a specific action as performance action control using a revolving body, even if the result of the game does not result in winning the specific result. , it is possible to freely stop a specific pattern combination, and the degree of freedom in the timing of granting a specific privilege can be greatly improved. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the specific privilege cannot be granted.

In addition, when the game in which the specific combination of symbols can be stopped based on the winning of the specific result overlaps with the game in which the specific action is to be executed, the specific pattern is used in the execution of the specific action and the normal action. Since the execution of the special notification to stop the combination is restricted, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that a specific pattern combination is displayed many times.

It should be noted that the configurations defined by the features C1 to C11 may be applied individually to the feature C12, or may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, a part of the configurations limited by the features C1 to C11 may be applied, and the part of the configurations may be applied in combination with each other.

The inventions described in the features C1 to C12 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C12, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B22, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. One game is started based on a predetermined start operation by a player and ends based on satisfaction of a predetermined end condition,
In a gaming machine in which the result of the game is notified by a predetermined notification means,
Output means for outputting specific information corresponding to the result of the game to a device external to the gaming machine (function for executing timer update processing by the main control device 101);
A game in which the specific information is output by the output means is defined as a specific game, and a first setting means (main control a function of performing processing for setting a reservation state by setting an AT preparation counter by the device 101;
A second setting means for performing a second setting for outputting the specific information after the first setting means performs the setting and before the output means outputs the specific information. (a function of executing processing for setting a reservation output counter by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the output of the specific information corresponding to the game result to the device outside the gaming machine is performed via the first setting and the second setting. In this way, by configuring the specific information to be output through a plurality of setting processes, the accuracy of the output specific information is improved. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally operate the update of the data display connected to the gaming machine by making the user not to do so. Moreover, in the above configuration, the output setting of the specific information is first set in the game before the game in which the specific information is output, and after the first setting is performed, Since the second setting, which is set before the specific information is output, and the second setting, the execution timing of any setting process does not overlap with the output timing of the specific information, and processing overlaps. It is possible to eliminate the increase in processing load due to

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the second setting means sets an output timing of the specific information in the specific game as the second setting.

According to the above configuration, after the first setting of the specific information output is performed in the previous game, the process of setting the output timing of the specific information in the specific game is performed in the second setting. By adopting such a configuration, the output means for outputting the specific information only has to determine the timing set by the second setting means, and the process at the time of outputting the specific information can be dramatically simplified. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to eliminate an increase in the processing load due to the decentralization of processing, and furthermore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of an error occurring when outputting the specific information, and improve the accuracy of the specific information. It is possible to

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second setting means sets a timing before the end of the specific game after the specific game is started as the output timing of the specific information.

According to the above configuration, the output timing of the specific information is midway between the start of the specific game and the end of the specific game. In this way, in a configuration in which an external output is performed in the middle of a single game, the process for progressing the game and the process for the external output overlap, and there is concern about an increase in the processing load. Since the process for external output is simplified, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load.

Feature D4. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing the start operation;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a termination operation for establishing the termination condition;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
with
The second setting means may set, as the output timing of the specific information, a timing before each of the orbiting bodies stops based on the operation of the stop operation means after the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized by:

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature D3. In a so-called slot machine in which a plurality of revolving bodies are started to revolve based on the operation of the starting operation means and the revolving bodies are stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, the game progresses according to the player's operation. It is a configuration, and the process for progressing the game tends to be complicated. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the timing at which the processing for progressing the game is performed and the timing at which the specific information is output overlap, as in the above configuration, the processing for outputting the specific information is simplified. , it is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load.

Feature D5. After the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, the invalidation means for invalidating the stop of the orbiting body based on the operation of the stop operation means or the operation for a predetermined period (in the rotation start processing by the main controller 101 function to execute processing to set the invalid period),
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the second setting means sets the timing during the predetermined period of time invalidated by the invalidating means as the output timing of the specific information.

According to the above configuration, the specific information is output during the predetermined period as the invalid period of the stop operation means. With such a configuration, the specific information is output in a situation where it is not necessary to perform drive control based on the player's operation, that is, in a situation where it is not necessary to monitor the player's operation, resulting in duplication of processing. can be preferably avoided.

When this configuration is applied to a gaming machine that performs a "pseudo game", the "predetermined period" as the invalid period corresponds to the period during which the pseudo game is performed. In this case, ``lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding a privilege to a player''; and limiting the "predetermined period" by the "ineffective means" as "the period during which the suspension of the orbiting body is not subject to the granting of benefits by the privilege granting means or the granting of benefits is restricted". good.

Feature D6. After the revolving of each revolving body is started, at a timing before each revolving body can be stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, a predetermined specific pattern combination is performed by the player. Specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by main controller 101) for driving and controlling each of the rotating bodies so as to generate a specific situation existing at a specific position set at a position visible from the The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, in the slot machine in which the game progresses according to the player's operation, the slot machine circulates so that the specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position occurs before the game can be ended. In some cases, body drive control is performed, and the output timing of the specific information is set so that the specific information is output under such circumstances. With such a configuration in which the specific information is output at the timing when the so-called revolving body rotation effect is performed, the data display connected to the game machine is updated by performing the rotation effect. It is also possible to make it so that it is possible to preferably associate the rotation effect with the result of the game. Moreover, since the output setting of the specific information is performed in advance, even in a situation where such a special rotation control is performed, the processing load does not increase due to the output processing. It is possible to preferably enjoy the effect of associating the output of the specific information with the rotation effect.

Feature D7. When a predetermined setting opportunity (preparation mode transition) occurs, the first setting means specifies a predetermined game among games subsequent to the game in which the setting opportunity occurs as the first setting. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that it is set as a game.

According to the above configuration, the first setting means is configured to set a game for outputting the specific information as the first setting for outputting the specific information. In this way, if the first setting means first sets which game the specific information is to be output, the second setting means determines whether or not it is the set specific game when performing the second setting. This eliminates the need for the process of determining whether or not there is an output trigger for the specific information.

Feature D8. After setting the specific game, the first setting means causes a predetermined specific event (when AT mode start results in winning and non-winning) in a game before the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature D7, characterized in that, in a case where the game has been set, the game prior to the specific game that has already been set can be reset to the specific game.

According to the above configuration, after the specific game is set by the first setting means, when the specific event occurs, the specific game is brought forward, and the game before the set specific game is the specific game. reset. By doing so, in the configuration in which the game for which the specific information is to be output is set in advance, the degree of freedom of the game for which the specific information is to be output is improved. Moreover, even in such a game, since the first setting means resets the specific game, the second setting means only needs to determine whether or not it is the specific game when performing the second setting. It is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load in the specific game while improving the degree of freedom of the specific game.

The inventions described in the features D1 to D8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, the technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B22, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, and the features E1 to E9 for each configuration of the features D1 to D8 can be applied individually, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. a game value imparting means capable of imparting a game value corresponding to
A gaming machine comprising
When the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means stops at the valid position based on the operation by the stop operation means, the game value giving means controls to give the game value corresponding to the predetermined result. Let the game be a normal game,
When the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means stops at the effective position based on the operation by the stop operation means, the game value giving means does not give the game value corresponding to the predetermined result, or Provided with a pseudo-game means capable of executing a pseudo-game that is a game whose grant is limited (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101),
The pseudo-game means, after the first revolving body of the revolving bodies has stopped in the normal game, by stopping the second revolving body of the revolving bodies as the pseudo-game, at least the Execution of a specific pseudo-game in which a specific pattern combination including the patterns attached to the first and second loops is set to a position where it can be visually recognized through the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by being able to

According to the above configuration, the rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game value corresponding to the result of the lottery is given, a pseudo-game is set in which no game value is given even if the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Therefore, not only the normal game that is associated with the lottery of each game on a one-to-one basis, but also the pseudo-game that does not correspond to the lottery is interwoven with the normal game. can.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the pseudo-game is configured to be able to stop a specific combination of symbols by using the stop result in the normal game, and the boundary between the normal game and the pseudo-game is set in one game. Even if a result that does not correspond to the lottery result is notified by the stop result of the pseudo game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression of being informed by pseudo performance. In addition, compared to the configuration in which all the revolving bodies are stopped in the pseudo-game, the number of stop operations required in one game to stop the specific pattern combination is reduced by the amount of the normal game, and the specific pattern is reduced. It is also possible to smoothly play a game in which combinations are stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the presentation effect of the pseudo-game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. After the pseudo game of stopping the specific pattern combination is performed by the pseudo game means, the normal game of the second revolving body is performed while the first revolving body is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in one game, after the first revolving body stops as a normal game, the second revolving body stops as a pseudo game, and then the normal game of the second revolving body is performed. . In this case, since the first circulating body remains stopped, the stop operation of the first circulating body is not forced again, and the significance of playing a pseudo-game using the stop result of the first circulating body is increased. can be done.

Feature E3. After the pseudo game of stopping the specific pattern combination is performed by the pseudo game means, the normal game of the second revolving body is performed while the first revolving body is stopped, and the second revolving body is played. When the pattern combination including the patterns attached to the first loop and the second loop is a pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means in the game, the game value corresponding to the lottery result is The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the game value is awarded by the game value giving means.

According to the above configuration, after the normal game is performed in one game, the pseudo game is performed, and then the normal game is performed. And, without using the pattern of the second circular body stopped in the pseudo-game, the game value is given using the pattern stopped in the normal game performed before and after the pseudo-game. becomes. By doing so, in the game property in which the pseudo-game is incorporated in the middle of one game, without increasing the operation as a normal game for obtaining the game value corresponding to the lottery result of the one game, It is possible to suitably impart a game value.

Feature E4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the game value imparting means provides a game value corresponding to the specific result by stopping the specific pattern combination at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is the specific result, the game value corresponding to the specific result is awarded by stopping the specific pattern combination at the valid position as the normal game. On the premise of such a configuration, by stopping a specific pattern combination in a pseudo-game, the effect of making the pseudo-game resemble a normal game can be enhanced, and the effect of the pseudo-game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Feature E5. Advantage determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) that performs an advantage determination (AT mode shift lottery) that causes an advantageous event for the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity;
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result that causes the advantageous event, the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, and the specified combination of symbols is stopped at the effective position. a first advantageous means for generating the advantageous event (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode in the winning result handling process by the main controller 101);
Second advantageous means (main controller 101 A function that executes processing to start AT mode when performing rotation by) and
The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific pattern combination stops in a normal game, not only is the game value corresponding to the specific result given, but also an advantageous event is provided on the condition that the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result. occurs, and an advantageous event also occurs when a specific pattern combination stops in a pseudo-game. By doing so, the stopping of a specific pattern combination and the occurrence of an advantageous event are set, and the stopping of a specific pattern combination in a pseudo-game and the occurrence of a specific pattern combination in a normal game. The effect of simulating stopping is enhanced. Moreover, even if it is a pseudo-game that does not correspond to the lottery result of one game, a privilege based on a result different from the lottery result of the game is given for stopping the revolving body in the pseudo-game. is possible, and the significance of the existence of pseudo-games can be enhanced.

Feature E6. The pseudo-game means is characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from the specific result, the specific pseudo-game is executed. Described in feature E4 or feature E5 game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is a special result different from the specific result and the specific pattern combination cannot be stopped at the valid position in the normal game, the specific pattern combination is selected as the specific pseudo-game. can be stopped. In other words, if it is a specific result and a game that can stop a specific pattern combination in a normal game, the normal game is prioritized without relying on the execution of the specific pseudo-game. By doing so, the player can expect the production effect using the specific pseudo-game while respecting the gameplay of the normal game such as obtaining a privilege by stopping the stop number according to the lottery result. It becomes possible.

Feature E7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means When operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, a pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination can be stopped,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means A configuration in which a pattern combination different from the special pattern combination can be stopped when operated in the second stop order,
Said pseudo game means, when the lottery result by said lottery means is said special result, said specific pseudo game using said first and said second circulating bodies so as to be in said first stop order The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized by executing

According to the above configuration, the specific result that the specific pattern combination can be stopped and the special result that triggers the execution of the specific pseudo-game are results in which the stop numbers differ depending on the operation order of the stop operation means. A specific pattern combination can be stopped by operating in the first stop order when winning a specific result, and a special pattern combination can be stopped by operating in the first stop order when winning a special result. When the specific pseudo-game is executed when the special result is won, the first and second loops are operated in the first stop order, and as a result, the result of the game is , the special symbol combination will stop. By doing so, even if the player wins the special result, the player is expected to operate in the operation order at the time of winning the specific result and stop the specific pattern combination, and the stop output corresponding to the lottery result of the game is expected. It is possible to stop the eyes.

Feature E8. Order notification means capable of executing order notification including the first stop order and the second stop order by a predetermined notification means (function for executing processing for performing push order notification by main controller 101) with
The order notification means executes the order notification corresponding to the first stop order when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the specific pseudo game is executed by the pseudo game means. It is characterized by having a specific order notification means (a function of executing processing for notifying the pressing order when the pressing order bell is won in a game in which the rotation effect is executed by the main control device 101). The gaming machine described in E7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the players are operated in the first operation order when the special result is won, as in feature E7.

Feature E9. The case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special picture combination stops at the effective position is better than the case where the picture combination different from the special picture combination stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature E7 or feature E8, which is advantageous for the player.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect the production effect of the specific pseudo game while preventing the loss of the player by playing the specific pseudo game when the special result is won.

The inventions described in the features E1 to E9 are known as "a type of gaming machine such as a pachinko machine and a slot machine. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E9, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B22, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, and the features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group E individually to each configuration of feature group A to feature group E detailed above, It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result that allows the specific combination of symbols to be stopped at the effective position set to the position visible through the display unit, it is possible to provide the specific privilege. special privilege means,
By the drive control means, when the start operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is stopped, and by the privilege provision means The normal operation is to be controlled so that the privilege can be granted,
Each of the revolving bodies is performed so as to perform a specific action that causes a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect control using the revolving body. a specific drive control means for controlling the body;
a specific means capable of restricting the specific action from being performed by the specific drive control means when the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific result in the specific game targeted for execution of the specific action;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images